JP6500177B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention executes a variable display game based on winning of the game ball to the start winning opening provided in the game area, and can give the player game value when the result of the variable display game is a special result. Relates to a gaming machine that generates a special game state.

  In a gaming machine that executes a special view variation display game based on winning on a starting winning opening, a first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening are provided as a starting winning opening that can always be paid in the gaming area where the gaming ball flows down There is known a gaming machine which executes a first special view variation display game based on winning on the first start winning opening and executes a second special view variation display game based on winning on the second start winning opening.

  In such a gaming machine, when the game ball is fired to one side of the game area, it is possible to win a prize at the first start winning opening, and when the game ball is fired to the other side of the game area, a win is awarded to the second start prize hole. There is known a gaming machine in which a start winning opening is disposed to enable the game and a start winning opening to be made winning can be selected by adjusting the power of the game ball (for example, see Patent Document 1). .

JP, 2013-215370, A

In the design of such a gaming machine, it is assumed that the starting winning opening to be aimed at is determined in accordance with the gaming state, and the player plays the game according to this, but the starting winning opening unintended by the designer is There is a risk that the targeted game may be played.
An object of the present invention is to make it possible to play a game in line with the design of a gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
A variable display game is executed based on the game ball winning to the start winning opening provided in the game area, and a special game state capable of giving a game value to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result In a gaming machine that generates
A first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening disposed at a different position from the first starting winning opening as the starting winning opening,
First variation display game execution control means capable of executing a first variation display game as the variation display game based on winning of a game ball on the first start winning opening;
And second variation display game execution control means capable of executing a second variation display game as the variation display game based on winning of the game ball on the second start winning opening,
The first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening adjust the power of the game balls to aim for winning on the first starting winning opening, and winning on the second starting winning opening. Arranged in the game area to be able to select the state to aim at,
As gaming state, a first game condition defined as variable display games first variable display game is the main, and the second game condition in which the second variable display game is defined as a variable display game as a main, and Have
At least in the first gaming state, the number of judgments of abnormality is based on one or both of the winning on the starting winning opening corresponding to the non-main variable display game and the start of the non-main variable display game. further and new to the abnormality determining the number of management means,
And a response unit that performs a predetermined response based on the fact that the abnormality determination number satisfies a predetermined condition .
The abnormality determination number management means is characterized in that, when the main variable display game is changed due to the change of the game state, the number of abnormality determinations is not updated for a predetermined period after the change .

The invention according to claim 2 is
A variable display game is executed based on the game ball winning to the start winning opening provided in the game area, and a special game state capable of giving a game value to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result In a gaming machine that generates
A first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening disposed at a different position from the first starting winning opening as the starting winning opening,
First variation display game execution control means capable of executing a first variation display game as the variation display game based on winning of a game ball on the first start winning opening;
And second variation display game execution control means capable of executing a second variation display game as the variation display game based on winning of the game ball on the second start winning opening,
The first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening adjust the power of the game balls to aim for winning on the first starting winning opening, and winning on the second starting winning opening. Arranged in the game area to be able to select the state to aim at,
As a game state, there is a first gaming state defined as a variable display game mainly composed of the first variable display game, and a second gaming state set as a variable display game mainly composed of the second variable display game And
At least in the first gaming state, the number of judgments of abnormality is based on one or both of the winning on the starting winning opening corresponding to the non-main variable display game and the start of the non-main variable display game. Anomaly determination number management means to be updated;
A response unit that performs a predetermined response based on the fact that the abnormality determination number satisfies a predetermined condition;
Launch operation detection means for detecting a launch operation of the gaming ball;
The abnormality determination number management means is characterized in that the number of abnormality determinations is not updated in a predetermined period after the start of the emission operation is detected by the emission operation detection means .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to play a game in line with the design of a gaming machine.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the composition of a collective display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 1 display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 display. It is a figure explaining composition of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening and closing pattern of special fluctuation winning a prize device. It is a figure explaining the opening and closing pattern of special fluctuation winning a prize device. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining input processing. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 abnormal change monitoring processing. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number. It is a figure explaining the example in which the special figure 2 abnormal change information is performed. It is a flow chart explaining game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening 1 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure starting opening 2 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining special processing 1 special processing. It is a flow chart explaining special processing 2 special processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining high probability change frequency number update processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing of the special figure 1 during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing of special figure 2 during fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining the special figure 1 during change processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 during change processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing 2 during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 2 during a special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process under special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the process under special figure 2 display. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining special processing 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special processing 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing 1 during the special winning opening open. FIG. 20 is a flowchart for describing a process shift setting process 2 during the special winning opening open process. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit fanfare middle processing. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit middle process. It is a flowchart explaining small hit residual ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hitting end processing. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. It is a flowchart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining starting opening 1 signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining symbol fixed frequency signal edit processing. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation mode of the design for production. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining an effect lottery process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the number display part of games in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode on the display apparatus in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode on the display apparatus in a 1st modification. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth switch surveillance processing in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the example in which the special figure 2 abnormal change information in a 3rd modification is performed. It is a figure explaining change of the special figure 2 unusual winning a prize number in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining change of the special figure 2 unusual winning a prize number in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the composition of the collective display in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the discontinuation of the special figure fluctuation display game in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display apparatus at the time of interruption in a 4th modification, and a special view display. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display apparatus at the time of interruption in a 4th modification, and a special view display. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game processing in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game processing in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 big hit end processing in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 2 big hit end processing in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hitting end processing in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hitting end processing in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the pattern of the control method in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode on the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the composition of the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the composition of the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the composition of the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the composition of the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of the composition of the special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining transition of the game state in the 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the transmission timing of the probability information command in a 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the transmission timing of the customer waiting command in a 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number in a 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the addition possible state judging processing in the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of change of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining another example of addition possible state judging processing in the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining another example of change of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining another example of addition possible state judging processing in the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number in a 9th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing in the 9th modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number in a 10th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing in the 10th modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number in the 11th modification. It is a flow chart explaining processing under special figure 2 display in the 11th modification. It is a flow chart explaining processing under special figure 2 display in the 11th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning a prize opening remaining ball processing in the 11th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end processing shift setting processing in the 11th modification. It is a flowchart explaining small hit remaining ball processing in the 11th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a 12th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the reception command check process in a 12th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the receiving command analysis process in a 12th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the one-shot system command processing in the 12th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the alerting | reporting delay process in a 12th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the starting opening switch monitoring process in a 13th modification.

First Embodiment
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device, and the like. Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a presentation button 25 incorporating a presentation button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, and the discharge button operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen. In addition, on the left and right portions of the center case 40, there is provided a board effect device 44 that effects the game by operating. The panel rendering device 44 is operable toward the center of the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.

  Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are disposed, and on the lower right side of the center case 40, one general winning opening 35 is disposed. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 12).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a first start winning opening 36 (a start winning opening, a start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special view 1 variation display game. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 12). Further, at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a second start winning opening 37 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special view 2 variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 12).

  Below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right of the first start winning opening 36, a first special convertible into a state in which the game ball is not accepted or a state in which it is easily accepted by the result of the special view variation display game. A fluctuation winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is disposed.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the upper big winning opening (convenient closing state for the player) is converted to open state (advantage state for the player). That is, the first special variation winning device 38 has, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by the opening and closing door 38c driven by the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 12) as a drive device. During the special game state based on the above, it is made easy to flow the game ball into the large winning opening by converting the upper large winning opening from the closed state to the open state, and the player can obtain a predetermined gaming value (prize ball ) Is given.

  Inside the prize winning opening (winning area), a prize winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 12) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the prize winning opening. There is. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two upper prize winning opening switches 38a are provided, and a gaming ball having flowed into the upper winning prize openings is detected by any upper winning prize opening switch 38a. By providing a plurality of upper large winning opening switch 38a in this manner, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball flowing into the upper large winning opening.

  Just below the first start winning opening 36, a second special variation winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 is provided which can be converted into a state of not accepting the game ball and a state of easy acceptance according to the result of the special view variation display game. It is done. The second special variation winning device 39 is provided with an open / close door 39c which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side.

  The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type open / close door 39c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and the result of the special view variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the lower large winning opening (unfavorably closed state for the player) is converted to open state (state advantageous for the player). That is, the second special variation winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by a lower large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 12) as a drive device. During the special gaming state based on the above, it is possible to facilitate the flow of gaming balls into the lower large winning opening by converting the lower large winning opening from the closed state to the open state, and the player can obtain a predetermined gaming value (prize ball ) Is given.

  A lower large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 12) is disposed inside (lower winning area) of the lower large winning opening as a detecting means for detecting the game ball entering the large winning opening. . Further, below the second special variation winning device 39, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize.

  The arrangement of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, the second special fluctuation winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper or lower side of the first special fluctuation winning device 38 in FIG. In this case, the upper and lower portions may be completely overlapped, or only a part may be vertically overlapped with the left and right offset. In addition, the opening and closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attachment type, and other types such as a slide type capable of opening the big winning opening by sliding a plate-like member capable of closing the big winning opening. It may be in the form of

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike), so that the player can aim for winning on the first start winning opening 36, and shoots the game ball to the right side game area. By performing (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for winning in the second starting winning opening 37 and the first special variation winning device 38. It should be noted that the second special variation winning device 39 can aim at firing the game ball to either the left or the right game area.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming area, and is discharged to the right gaming area. The gaming ball thus formed is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows the game balls passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside, The game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, the game ball flowing down the right play area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42 .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, at the lower right of the game board 30), a special figure 1 variation display game for making a special figure variation display game or a batch of special information 2 variation display game displays and various information A display device 50 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display for a special view 1 variation display game configured of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like (first special view variation display unit) 51 (D1) and the special figure 2 display for the special view 2 change display game (second special view change display part) 52 (D2), start figure number notification of the special view 1 change display game composed of the LED lamp Storage display unit 54 (D11 to D14).

  In addition, the round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the big hit (the number of opening and closing of the first special fluctuation winning apparatus 38 or the second special fluctuation winning apparatus 39) on the collective display device 50; The first gaming state display unit 77 (D8 to D10) which informs the player of the striking manner (a striking manner corresponding to the gaming state) in the normal hitting) and the right hitting, and the probability state (high of special view fluctuation display game) A probability display unit 78 (D15 to D18) for notifying of the probability state or the low probability state) is provided. In the collective display unit 50, a probability state display unit displays that the probability state of big hit is high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when big hit occurs and reports occurrence of big hit A unit (display) or the like may be provided. Furthermore, the ordinary forming the second starting winning opening where the game ball can be won based on the common drawing variation display game being executed like the conventional gaming machine and the common drawing variation display game becoming the specified result When the variable winning device is provided, a common drawing display unit for displaying the common drawing fluctuation display game, a storage display unit for starting memory number notification of the common drawing fluctuation display game, and a time saving state occurrence when the time saving state occurs A time shorting notification unit or the like may be provided to notify the user.

  The special view variation display game in the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 is, for example, the middle of the variation display game, ie, while the decorative special view variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 ms. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, in the special view 1 fluctuation display game in the special view 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 3B, in addition to the central segment, it is provided on the lower side of 7 segments rightward The eighth segment is also driven to blink to indicate that it is changing, so that it is possible to distinguish between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Then, when the result of the game is "detachment", for example, the central segment (in addition to the special segment 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on as a result mode of the declination, and the result of the game is In the case of "hit", the game result is displayed with the result mode (e.g., numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the offset being on as the hit result mode (special result mode).

  The memory display unit 54 sets the number of undivided balls (number of starting memories = number of holdings) out of the number of winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 serving as the fluctuation start condition of the special view 1 display 51 as shown in FIG. As shown in), it is displayed by turning off and lighting (flickering) a plurality of LEDs. The round display unit 60 is configured by an LED lamp or the like, and as shown in FIG. 3D, when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off, and during the special game state, selected according to the special result. Turn on the LED corresponding to the number of rounds. The round display unit may be configured by a 7-segment display.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 3 (e), the first gaming state display unit 77 turns off all the LEDs when the game state in which the left hitting is more advantageous for the player than the right hitting (normal hitting). If the player is in a game state in which the right strike is more advantageous to the player than the left strike (right strike), all the LEDs are turned on. As shown in FIG. 3E, the probability display unit 78 turns all LEDs off when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability state) In the case of state), all the LEDs are turned on.

  FIG. 4 shows a display mode on the special view 1 display unit 51. During the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game, the central segment and the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of 7 segments are blinked in a cycle of 100 ms. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a mode corresponding to the result with the end of the fluctuation time. There is also a case where a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like.

  5 and 6 show display modes on the special view 2 display 52. FIG. During the variable display of the special view 2 variable display game, the central segment blinks at a cycle of 100 ms. Then, the result is displayed by lighting in a mode corresponding to the result with the end of the fluctuation time. There is also a case where a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like. A plurality of lighting modes are set for each of the big hit and the small hit which will be described later, but this does not clearly notify the player which small hit has occurred, particularly when the small hit has occurred (recognition In this way, it is possible to prevent the act of trying to acquire a game ball illegally at the time of a small hit by looking at the lighting mode of the special view 2 display 52.

  FIG. 7 shows the probability of the big hit and the small hit, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. Note that the jackpot is a special result (first special result) involving the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not involving the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view fluctuation display game (big hit symbol stop display), and when the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and the first as a special motorized role It means that a specific flag for successively operating the special fluctuation winning device 38 or the second special fluctuation winning device 39 is set (the bonus continuous operating device is activated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

  The big hit probability, which is the probability of being a big hit (first special result), is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the probability in the normal gaming state which is the low probability state and the specific gaming state which is the high probability state is shown in FIG. The probability is as shown in 7 (a). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the special game state based on the big hit (the first special game state) is in high probability state, and when the special figure fluctuation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) It is configured to be In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result figure of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are high probability states.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of being a small hit (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. 7 (b). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state or the big hit probability. In the jackpot and jackpot lottery, the jackpot and the jackpot are not won in duplicate. Therefore, in the high probability state, the special figure 2 is always elected to either the big hit or the small hit. In addition, it may be made to become an out result.

  Also, FIG. 7 (c) shows the jackpot types selectable in the special view 1 and the special view 2, and the special fluctuation winning device and distribution probability opened in each jackpot type, and FIG. 7 (d) shows the special 1 and 2 show the selectable small hit types, the special variation winning device opened with each small hit type, the opening time and the number of opening times, and the distribution probability. In addition, although it is a big hit about 2R probability variation D1 of special figure 2, since it is a big hit, the number of the special figure change display games which can be performed in a high probability state is set again 50 times. In the special gaming state based on the 2R probability variation D1, an effect is provided such that the number of games that can be executed in the high probability state is added.

  8 and 9 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 8A shows a fluctuation pattern in the case where the result is out in the low probability state. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for winning in the first start winning opening 36 by left hitting, and to aim for winning in the second starting winning opening 37 by right hitting. It has become. That is, it is possible to select which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game to be mainly executed by the player's intention. In addition, depending on the game state, it is designed on the assumption that the game is mainly progressed in one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the player follows the game according to this design. In order to advance, it is configured that it is advantageous for the player to advance the game mainly on one of the special view variation display games determined to be the main design. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

  In the low probability state, the special figure 1 variation display game is designed as the main variation, and the special figure 2 variation display game is designed as the irregular variation. In order to make the player proceed with the game according to this design, as for Special Figure 2, even if any variation pattern is selected, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time which can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is longer than the fluctuation time which can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The probability of a small hit is higher than that of the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 2 variable display game, but in the case of a falling result or in the case of a small hit described later The execution of the variable display game is timely inefficient, and in the low probability state, the player is made to advance the game mainly with the special view 1 variable display game.

  FIG. 8 (b) shows a fluctuation pattern in the case where the result is out in the high probability state. In the high probability state, the variation pattern is not set because the result of the lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game does not become out of place. In addition, only one variation pattern is selected for the special figure 1 variation display game. In the high probability state, contrary to the case of the low probability state described above, the special figure 2 variation display game is designed as the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is set as the irregular variation.

  Here, the fluctuation time in the case of a shift result in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation in the high probability state is the shift result in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation in the low probability state Is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time (see FIG. 8A). As described later, a short time is set as the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a big hit or small hit in the high probability state as described later, and in the high probability state, the drawing for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is drawn There is no case that the result of

  That is, in the high probability state in which the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is short and can be executed efficiently in time, the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of losing as a result of the lottery is obviously disadvantageous. Even if the fluctuation time is not set so long, it is possible to make the player proceed with the special view 2 fluctuation display game mainly. Therefore, it is not necessary to set a fluctuation time longer than necessary as the fluctuation time of the special view 1 fluctuation display game, but the special view 2 fluctuation display game is mainly used when it is executed simultaneously with the special view 2 fluctuation display game. In order for the game to proceed, it is made to be forcibly stopped by a big hit or a small hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as a sufficiently long fluctuation time with respect to the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

  FIG. 9A shows a fluctuation pattern in the case where the result is a big hit in the low probability state. As for the special figure 2, it is possible to select only the fluctuation pattern which does not generate the reach state. In the low probability state, the variation time when the special view 2 variation display game is a big hit may be a variation time longer than the selectable variation time when the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit. FIG. 9B shows a variation pattern in the case where the result is a big hit in the high probability state. None of them generates a reach state, and a very short fluctuation time fluctuation pattern is selected.

  In particular, for the special view 1 change display game, the second shortest change time is selected when compared including the change time selectable in the case of a big hit or a small hit in the special view 2 change display game. ing. This increases the possibility that the special view 1 variation display game which is irregular variation even in the high probability state is stopped earlier than the special view 2 variation display game which is the main variation, and the big hit of the special view 1 variation display game Is forced to be less likely to be changed to an out result. In addition, although distribution of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is performed by the above-mentioned big hit kind, you may make it determine by a random number etc.

  FIG. 9C shows a fluctuation pattern in the case where the result is a small hit in the low probability state. As for the special figure 2, the reach condition is not generated, and the long variation in which the variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. FIG. 9D shows a fluctuation pattern in the case where the result is a small hit in the high probability state. None of them generates a reach state, and a very short fluctuation time fluctuation pattern is selected. In addition, about the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, although it is considered as the same time as the case of the loss in the high probability state, it is forced to stop by the big hit or small hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as well as the case of the loss. It is time enough to be Regarding the fluctuation time when the special view 1 fluctuation display game is out or small hit in the high probability state, it is sufficient time to be forcibly stopped by the big hit or small hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. For example, it may be shorter than the time shown here.

  In FIGS. 10 and 11, special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit (first special result) and special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result) are shown. The opening and closing pattern of the variable winning device is shown. FIG. 10 shows the opening and closing patterns of the special variation winning device in the big hit type and small hit type selectable in the special view 1 variable display game, and FIG. 11 shows the big hit type and small selectable in the special view 2 variable display game. The opening and closing pattern of the special variation winning device in the hit type is shown.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the big hit type becomes a big hit of 16R definite variation A1 in the special figure 1 variable display game, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened according to the special figure 1 large winning opening opening and closing pattern 1 . In the special figure 1 upper prize winning opening opening and closing pattern 1, an opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R) after a fan far period of 5000 ms. Thereafter, a round in which an interval period of 2000 ms and an open period of 29000 ms are set is repeated to perform up to 16 rounds, and the special gaming state ends after the ending period of 11000 ms.

  The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each opening and closing pattern shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 is a time obtained by adding the remaining ball processing time and the interval time or the ending time. For example, the interval period in the special figure 1 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 1 is 2000 ms, 1400 ms of the first half is the remaining ball processing time, and 600 ms of the second half is the interval time. In addition, the ending period in the special figure 1 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 1 is 11000ms, 1400ms of the first half is the remaining ball processing time, 9600ms of the second half is the ending time.

  The other opening and closing patterns include a fanfare period, an opening period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the drawing, and accordingly the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 is opened. The special prize winning opening / closing pattern 5 on the special figure 2 of FIG. 11 is configured by repeating the opening period of 27200 ms in 5R for 200 ms and closing for 1500 ms 11 times and then opening for 25000 ms. Also, in any of the opening and closing patterns, when there is a prescribed number of winnings in each round, the open period of the round ends at that time.

  In addition, for example, when the opening and closing pattern is the same from the start of the special game state to the middle like the special figure 1 upper large winning opening opening and closing patterns 1 to 3 and the special drawing 2 upper large winning opening opening opening and closing pattern 2, 3 The effect in the device 41 may be the same so that it is difficult to determine the type of big hit or small hit. In addition, it may be possible to suggest or notify information enabling determination of the type of big hit or small hit during the special game state.

  In addition, when the big hit is executed by either of special figure 2 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 4 and 5, the effect of whether the long opening round is executed again after the end of 4R (whether to continue or not) You may do so. In this case, for example, if special pattern 2 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 4 short opening is performed from 5R to the final round 16R and big hit is finished, if special drawing 2 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 5 is 5R After the short opening which is substantially the same as 5R to 16R of the special winning a prize opening / closing pattern 4 described above is performed in the long opening (25000 ms) is performed after the short opening is performed. . Therefore, using the time between 5R and 15R for the special figure 2 large winning opening / closing pattern 4 and the multiple short opening times of 5R for the special drawing 2 upper winning opening / closing pattern 5 Continuous effect is performed, if it is special figure 2 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 4, it announces the result of long open not being resumed (big hit game does not continue), if it is special drawing 2 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 5 The expectation of the player may be satisfied by notifying the result that the long opening resumes (the big hit game continues).

  From the above, in the special result, the first special result (big hit) which can generate the first special game state, and the second special game in which the game value which can be given to the player is lower than the first special game state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate the condition is included.

  In the following description, when the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a special view change display game. When the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as the decorative special figure fluctuation display game. Also, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). Further, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special gaming state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the general winning hole 35 and the first start winning hole 36, the second start winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and discharged from the gaming area 32 Be done. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39, A corresponding number of winning balls are discharged from the dispensing unit controlled by the dispensing control device 200 (see FIG. 12) to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

  The winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 are detected as starting winning balls for the special view 1 variation display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided internally, and the predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) is stored as the first starting memory. ) Are stored to the limit. When the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36 in a state where the special view 1 variation display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the first start memory along with the generation of the start right Is stored, and the first start memory number is incremented by one, and the special view 1 variable display game is started immediately based on the first start memory, at which time the first start memory number is decremented by one. . On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variation display game can not be started immediately, for example, the special figure 1 variation display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variation display game has not ended, or the special gaming state is set. If the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, the first start memory number is incremented by one and the first start memory is stored if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number. . Then, in a state where the first start memory number becomes 1 or more, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game can be started (when the previous special figure 1 fluctuation display game is ended or the special gaming state is ended), the first While the number of starting memories is decremented by one, the special view 1 variation display game is started based on the stored first starting memories.

  The winning balls to the second starting winning opening 37 are detected as starting winning balls for the special view 2 variation display game by the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. When there is a winning on the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the special view 2 variable display game can be started, the special view 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game can not be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game is already performed and the special figure 2 variable display game is not finished, or when it is in the special game state Even if the game ball is won in the second start winning opening 37, the second start memory does not occur. In addition, when there is a prize to the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 37 in the state which can start the special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory game, 2nd starting memory occurs once for convenience of processing, but the said 2nd starting memory is Since it will be digested immediately, the 2nd starting memory for suspending the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not occur.

  In addition, when the start winning ball is detected, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information, respectively, and the extracted random value is within the gaming control device 100 (see FIG. 12). The special map storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as a special map start storage up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times for the first start storage). Then, the storage number of the special view start storage is displayed on the storage display unit 54 (special view 1 suspension display) for the start winning number notification of the collective display unit 50 and also in the display unit 41 of the center case 40. It is displayed as a decoration special view start memory display.

  The game control apparatus 100 performs the special view 1 variation display game with the special view 1 display 51 (first variation display device) based on the winning or the first start storage on the first start winning opening 36, and the second start Based on the winning on the winning opening 37, the special view 2 change display game is performed on the special view 2 display 52 (second change display device). The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the other special figure fluctuation display game has a special result (big hit or small hit) When it becomes, the one special figure fluctuation display game is ended as a result other than the special result (a result of losing).

  In the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed in the display mode as shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the special result aspect (big hit result aspect) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes big hit, and it becomes 1st special game state (so-called big hit state). Also, when the result of the special view variation display game is a small hit, the special result mode in which the display mode of the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode) It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special view 1 display 51 forms a first change display means capable of displaying a first change display game (special view 1 change display game) based on the winning of the game ball on the first start winning opening 36. In addition, the special figure 2 indicator 52 forms the 2nd fluctuation indicatory expedient which can indicate the 2nd fluctuation indicatory game (special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory game) which is based on the winning of the game sphere to the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 37.

  In addition, in response to execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the display device (image display device) 41 fluctuates and displays a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) A special figure variation display game to be performed is to be executed. The decoration special figure variation display game includes an decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and an decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, which are separately Displayed in the display area of Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special view variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special view variation display game.

  That is, an ornament variation display game (variation display of ornament identification information corresponding to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) The decoration variation display means can be displayed to display the decoration special figure variation display game). Note that separate display devices may be used in the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special view 2 variation display game, but in the case of the normal gaming state which is a low probability state, the variation time is used as a variation pattern of the special view 2 variation display game A very long (about 10 minutes) length variation is selected. As a result, in the normal gaming state, execution of the special view 2 variable display game becomes temporally inefficient, and the player does not select the execution of the special view 2 variable display game aiming to obtain a small hit in the normal gaming state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is advantageous for the player to play the special view 1 variation display game by aiming left at the first start winning opening 36 by performing left strike. Although the time of the long fluctuation is about 10 minutes, it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

  Then, when a big hit occurs and the special game state is entered, the first special variation winning device 38 can be aimed by right-handing. When the second special variation winning device 39 is opened in a special game state based on a big hit or a small hit, it is possible to aim at either a right or left hit. After the end of the special gaming state based on the jackpot, it becomes a specific gaming state that is a high probability state. In this specific gaming state, the variation time of the special view 2 variation display game is short, so it is better for the player to perform the special view 2 variation display game by aiming at the second start winning opening 37 by right-handing It becomes. In the special game state, the opening of the special variation winning device based on the small hit and the opening of the special variation winning device based on the large hit occur frequently, and the player can obtain a large number of gaming balls.

FIG. 12 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are targets of replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit, small hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, a probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, One of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, and a starting opening 2 in the second starting winning opening 37 The switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the plurality of (1 to x, in the present embodiment, two) large winning opening switch 38a disposed in the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39 An interface chip that is connected to the lower large winning opening switch 39a, receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it to a 0V-5V positive logic signal ( Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper large winning opening switch 38a and the lower large winning opening switch 39a are the second input port 123 Input to Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the above and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the first special variation winning device 38. The opening / closing data of the lower large winning aperture solenoid 39b opens the second special variation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting the The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives open / close data signals of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38 b and the lower large winning opening solenoid 39 b output from the second output port 134 to generate and output a solenoid driving signal (a first driver (drive Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, a batch display device output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal of the digit line on the current lead-in side of 50, and an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 4 drivers 138 d are provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

  In addition, although it is not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch Non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as "proximity") which has a coil for detecting magnetism in the lower large winning opening switch 39a and detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. (Referred to as a switch) is used. Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at power failure A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls a device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which cooperates with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if a frame rendering device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for presentation) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling this frame rendering device is provided. good.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In these control circuits, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, the random number value etc. The first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. A big hit determination random number value or the like of the first start storage is compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit deviation or variation pattern of the special view 1 variation display game is performed. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the second starting winning opening 37, the random number value and the like for the big hit determination of the special view 2 variation display game is extracted Store start memory. A big hit determination random number value or the like of the second start storage is compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit out or variation pattern of the special view 2 variation display game is performed. The second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special view 2 variation display game can be started, and temporarily stores information necessary for starting the special view 2 variation display game. , Do not reserve the start of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52, processing is performed to display a special view variation display game which is stopped and displayed. That is, the game control for performing the progress control of the variable display game based on the winning of the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 37) of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 Make a means.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52 when the result of the special view variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and also the special game Perform processing to generate a state. In the processing for generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111A, for example, opens the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 by the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, and enables the flow of gaming balls into the upper large winning opening. Control to Alternatively, control is performed to open the open / close door 39c of the second special variation winning device 39 by the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b, and to allow the flow of gaming balls into the lower large winning opening.

  Then, until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls win in the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is The release (one round) is performed, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being hit in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the low probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result figure of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are high probability states.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main processing shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 18 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main processing, as shown in FIG. 14, a stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the values of registers etc. when an interrupt occurs after the processing for inhibiting the interrupt (step X1) is performed first Stack pointer setting processing (step X2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper order takes 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step X4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step X5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and processing for setting a power on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps X8 to X12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2 times) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and data bus and check it (step X8), and determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination (step X9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited for. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11). Is determined (step X12). If the timer value is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, access to read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13) And) output OFF data to all output ports (set to a state without output) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. From the state of the first input port 122, it is determined whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example 5 Ah) (step X17), and normal (Step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), the checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG. 15 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

  In addition, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 15 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  At step X21 in FIG. 15, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined.

  Thereafter, a command at the time of the power failure recovery corresponding to the special drawing status prepared to execute the special drawing game processing described later rationally is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step X22), Go to X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both under normal processing which will be described later, that is, if the special figure change display game is not being executed nor in the special game mode, The command of the waiting demo screen is transmitted, otherwise the command of the recovery screen is transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18 and X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step X23), and all areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step X25). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X26). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X27, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a command for RAM initialization (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) And transmit a plurality of commands such as a command for causing notification of the RAM initialization. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  At step X28, processing for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step X28, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step X29). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing After saving in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) (step X30), an interrupt is permitted (step X31). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, initial value random number update processing (step X32) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" which is updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are timer interrupt processing units of program processing. It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the same cycle CTC output (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing). Also, for the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value changing method" is employed in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step X32, set the number of times (for example, 2) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus and check (step X33) It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X34). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step X32). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step X31) before the initial value random number update process (step X32), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and in the case where such a method is adopted, the initial value random number update processing in step X32 above In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step X35; N), the process returns to the determination (step X34) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step X36). A process of outputting off data to the output port (step X37) is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step X38), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step X39). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating a checksum at power-off of the RWM, and a process (step X41) for saving the calculated checksum, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 16 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X40) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and "0" is set as the calculation value (step X53). . The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), and the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56). It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 to repeat the above processing. When the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 17 shows the initial value random number updating process (step X32) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is ended. Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure variation display game, and "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special figure variation display game in the special pattern variation display game It is the random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides small hitting stop design. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt is generated in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically inhibited, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 18 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step X103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, lower large winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed. In addition, when the signal of the firing stop is output in step X5 in the main process, the signal of the firing permission is output by performing the output process, and the firing permission signal is set to be in the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a, upper large winning opening switch 38a, lower large winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring of an error A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) is performed to determine whether the front frame and the glass frame are open.

  Next, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step X109) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted based on the winning of the game balls to the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. Then, a special figure 1 game process (step X110) that performs a process related to the special figure 1 change display game and a special figure 2 game process (step X111) that performs a process related to the special figure 2 change display game are performed.

Next, segment LED editing processing (step X112) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying special information related to the display of special view variation display game and various information to display desired content (step X112), magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), which performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality, and board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, the external information editing process (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122, is read (step X121). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and switch reading processing (step X128) is performed.

Thereafter, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X131), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), switch reading processing (step X133) is performed, and input processing is ended.

In the present embodiment, “prepare” means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.
Further, as information on the above-mentioned unused bit data and inverted bit data, information prepared corresponding to each input port is used.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X142), and the bit requiring inversion is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step X144). Thereafter, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step X146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X147), and the bit requiring inversion is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit is 0 in the first and second readings (step X150), and the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 are logically ANDed. It is set as a fixed bit (step X151).

  Next, an indeterminate bit pattern is created in which the state is 0 for the same state and 1 for the other bit in the first and second reading (step X152), and the logic between the indeterminate bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently decided bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step X154), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step X155), End the switch reading process.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch read changes the signal by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing with the result of the previous read. Although there is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been read, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost until the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step X104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 12) that outputs the data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b are synthesized and output (step X162).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step X164), combine the acquired information and the external information data (step X165). Then, the synthesized data is output to the port 136 for digit output and the port 137 for external information output (step X166). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the port 135 for segment output (step X168).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and synthesized (step X169), and the synthesized data and the output data of emission permission are synthesized (step X170), and the synthesized data is used for external information output Output to the port 137 (step X171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X172). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shot tester is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 ( Step X 175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step X176), and the output process is finished.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). The count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, if there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step X183; Y) in this determination, the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 to repeat the above processing.

  If it is determined in step X181 that there is a counted number (step X181; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter The number of payouts corresponding to the area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the winning ball remaining number area and the acquired payout number are added to obtain a new winning ball remaining number (step X186), and the game is saved in the winning ball remaining number area (step X187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, 10 which is a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the addition result (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, since the subtraction result is not saved in the winning ball remaining number area, the value before subtraction is stored in the winning ball remaining number area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output number area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step X191) Return to step X188.

  As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.

  In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control can not be immediately started. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the status of the payout busy signal, and is an idle state where payout control can be started immediately Either a busy state in which control can not be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  The undefined state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process when the power is turned on. In this undetermined state, the idle state or the busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time to indicate that the payout control can or can not be started immediately Eliminate it with That is, even if a status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is output from the dispensing control device 200 when a power failure occurs and returns from the power outage, the winning ball command is immediately issued to the dispensing control device 200. In response to the status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is continuously output over a predetermined period from the dispensing control device 200 without transmitting, a winning ball command is transmitted to the dispensing control device 200. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

  If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. Here, also in the case of an undefined state, it is determined that it is busy. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step X195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number.

  Then, when there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196). It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (step X197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 to repeat the above processing.

  If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step X198) A payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms, for example, is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the general winning opening 35, the first special variation winning device 38 provided in the gaming area 32) , Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the second special variation prize device 39), and a game based on the prize ball command sent from the game control means A payout control means (dispense control device 200) for performing a payout control of balls, and the game control means is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control. A status signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means when control is performed to send a winning ball command to the payout control means based on (busy signal) and a power failure occurs and returns from the blackout. Is output Even in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without continuously transmitting the winning ball command to the payout control means, the state signal is continuously output for a predetermined period. The winning ball command is to be sent to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 has different winning areas (a first start winning port 36, a second start winning port 37, a general winning port 35, a first special variation winning device 38, a second special variation winning device 39) having different numbers of winning balls. A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) can specify the presence / absence of non-transmission of a prize ball command instructing the payout control of the game ball for each number of prize balls, a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) , And the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200). It is made to transmit, and the identification of whether the status signal indicates that the payout control means can start the payout control is preceded by the identification of whether or not there is an unsent winning ball instruction in each winning ball instruction counter. It will be done.

  In addition, while overall game control is performed, the predetermined winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the general winning opening 35, the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39 Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to) and payout control for performing payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means And means (the payout control device 200), wherein the game control means is capable of starting the payout control in which the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control Means for transmitting the winning ball command to the payout control means (the game control apparatus 100), and the number of winning balls for which the payout is determined along with the winning of the gaming ball to the predetermined winning area Prize ball including information about Information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the game number (main award ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output means comprising a payout control means for outputting the status signal outputted from the payout control means The output of the winning ball signal is performed regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (a first start winning opening 36, a second start winning opening 37, a general winning opening 35). , A prize ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39), and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command of the present invention is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is configured to transmit information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. Can be memorized The number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball at a predetermined winning area at the time of winning, and updating the game ball in response to transmission to the award ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of the gaming ball in the predetermined winning area, and outputs the winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the cumulative value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is capable of storing information on the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and is updated when the gaming ball is prized in the predetermined prize area, By performing updating in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of winning balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 23 shows the random number updating process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number update process. In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

  If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value (step X223). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

  If the small hitting symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial step of the loaded small hit symbol random number The value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 24 shows the random number updating process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random update processing 2 Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is performed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Are configured to

  In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred based on the calculated address (step X233). At this time, in the table to be referred to, an upper limit judgment value, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made one round is stored for each type of random number.

  Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is loaded (step X234). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). Then, when the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X 236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value as the added value (hereinafter referred to as The mask update value is obtained by adding “1” to the masked value), and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step X237), and the process goes to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X 236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step X238), Go to step X239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

  Then, it is judged whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240) Proceed to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), set “0” as the high-order 1 byte of the random number and the low-order 1 byte of the random value to the value of the random number area (1 byte) ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

  In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step X233 (step X243). Then, if the new random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; N), the new random number is saved in a lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step X243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number is regarded as a new random number again (step X244). The data is saved in the lower random number area of the byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245).

  Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246). If it is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number updating process 2 is ended. If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), the new random number value (when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the high-order random number area of the 2-byte random number (step X247). And the random number updating process 2 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A is a variation pattern (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of gaming balls into the starting area of the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. Function as random number updating means for updating the variation pattern random number for determining.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 25 shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one upper winning opening switch 38a in the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step X301). Even if the special winning opening is not open, the illegal / winning monitoring process (step X302) is performed to monitor whether the special winning opening has an illegal winning and to detect a normal winning.

  In the winning opening monitoring table (corruption monitoring table), a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data to determine whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of the fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the wrong number area, a wrong prize error The notification command, the upper limit value of the number of incorrect winnings (the number of incorrect determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and information of the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. Further, in the winning opening switch table, information on the number of repetition of monitoring (number of switches), monitoring switch bit, address of winning number counter area 1, address of winning number counter area 2 is defined. The fraud monitoring table and the prize table are prepared according to the switches to be monitored.

  Thereafter, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower winning opening switch 39a in the lower winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) is prepared (step X303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step X304) for detecting a normal prize is executed. Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switches (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) (step X305). The winning number counter updating process (step X306) is performed to update. Then, special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing is performed to monitor the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state scheduled to be executed mainly by the special figure 1 variation display game (step X307).

  Next, the state scan counter is updated to designate in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring (step X308). This status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the status scan counter, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared (step X309). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X310) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like If set, and the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step X311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X312) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, status scanning When the value of the counter is 1, monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (step X313). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y), the gaming machine status check table 3 is prepared (step X314), and the status of the gaming machine is checked to determine whether an error has occurred. The process (step X315) is performed.

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like It is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step X316) is performed to set a busy signal flag based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is ended. Do. Since the processes of steps X314 to X316 are executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is 0, the process of steps X314 to X316 is executed once in four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps X314 to X316 are performed every 16 ms.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 26 shows the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps X302 and X304) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. The fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two upper winning prize opening switches 38a of the first special variation winning device 38 with respect to the lower big winning opening switch 39a of the second special variation winning device 39. As for the big prize winning opening (special variation winning combination devices 38 and 39), since it is easy to conduct fraudulently to open the opening door and insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball, the fraud is monitored in addition to the detection of the prize. .

  In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is underway (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch targeted for error monitoring is the upper large winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening for error monitoring When the switch is the lower large winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than the special gaming state in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened.

  Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of incorrect winnings after the addition is the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not 5) is exceeded (step X325).

  For example, when the winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the winning opening, and the gaming ball is in the effective period of the winning opening switch. The reason is that it is not to judge that the signal is illegitimate if the player has won a prize or the signal has a noise, and it is not so easy to judge it as an error although it is not illegitimate.

  Then, if the judgment number is not exceeded (step X325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). If the number of judged winnings is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of incorrect winnings is fixed to the number of false judgings (step X326), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target false winning notification timer area (step X 327). Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step X328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step X329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step X340). ).

  On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and the winning number counter update process (step X331) for setting the winning balls is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and it is determined whether or not the update permission of the notification timer is permitted (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. When updating of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), if the notification timer of interest is not 0, it is updated by 1 (step X334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch targeted for error monitoring is one of the large winning opening switches 38a, and permitted when the winning opening switch for errors monitoring is the other upper winning opening switch 38a. I will not. Thereby, with regard to the fraudulent notification about the first special variation winning device 38, the notification timer is updated twice as often, and it is prevented that time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms) . When the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large winning opening switch 39a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step X336), and set the fraud winning flag as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X 337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (Step X 338; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step X339), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X 338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted The value of the incorrect flag area is compared (step X340).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; Y), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step X342) The fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 27 shows winning number counter updating processing (steps X306 and X331) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening switch table of the winning opening monitoring table (step X 351), and input to the target winning opening switch (exactly input change ) Is determined (step X352).

  If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether it overflows Step X 355). If no overflow occurs (step X 355; N), the updated value is saved in winning number counter area 1 (step X 356), and the value of target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X 357). ). If an overflow occurs (step X 355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X 357).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X 357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X 358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step X 359). When no overflow occurs (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), It is determined whether monitoring of all switches has ended (step X362). If an overflow occurs (step X359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step X362).

  If monitoring of all switches has not ended (step X362; N), the process returns to the process (step X352) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Processing command setting process]
FIG. 28 shows rendering command setting processing (step X342) in the above-mentioned fraud & prize monitoring processing. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374) It is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X 375; Y), the process returns to step X 374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X 375; N), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X 376), and the effect command setting process is ended.

  As described above, since the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the timing of command transmission can be advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to capture a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing]
FIG. 29 shows the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (step X307) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. As described above, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to play the special view 1 variation display game in the normal gaming state which is the low probability state, but the player who does not know this Alternatively, it is also conceivable that the player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game performs a right strike. In the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, a process for performing notification to urge such a player to perform a left strike is performed.

  In addition, the abnormal fluctuation here means the irregular fluctuation which is a special figure fluctuation display game which is not main. Even in the normal game state, it is possible to win the second start winning opening 37, so even if it is an irregular change, it is a valid special view change display game, use of gaming balls and magnets with thread, electric waves This is different from cheating in which a prize is detected illegally by launching a game etc. and a special figure variation display game is executed. However, it is not preferable that the special figure variation display game is continued to be executed in the special figure variation display game which is determined to be mainly in the design of the gaming machine, and such irregular variation is detected here. The special figure 2 abnormal variation number is counted, and when the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches a specified value, the corresponding processing is performed. Of course, even if a special figure 2 variation display game is executed, which causes irregular variation to be detected irregularly in the second start winning opening 37 by the use of gaming balls and magnets attached yarns, the launch of radio waves, etc. 2 Abnormal fluctuation numbers are counted. That is, regardless of whether or not it is a fraudulent act, the special figure 2 abnormal variation count is counted when the special figure 2 variation display game causing irregular variation is executed.

  In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is started in a low probability state. If the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not present (step X381; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387). When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is present (step X381; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X382), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (step X383).

  Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 18) (step X384), and if smaller than the prescribed value (step X384; Y), whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag It determines (step X387). In addition, when it is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation count which is added by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being executed in normal game state (low probability state) is 0 For example, -1 is updated (step X385), the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X386), and it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to zero.

  The special figure 2 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in a low probability state. In the determination (step X387) as to whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present, the process proceeds to step X390 where the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not present (step X387; N). If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X388), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by 1 (step X389). (2) It is determined whether the number of abnormal fluctuations is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 5) (step X390).

  That is, the special figure 2 check flag is set based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game which is a non-mainly variation display game (irregular variation) in the low probability state, and the special figure 2 check flag is set. On the basis of this, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number that makes the abnormal judgment number is updated (added here) in the abnormality occurrence direction. Also, based on the start of the main variable display game (main change), the special figure 1 fluctuation number that makes the abnormal cancellation number is updated (here added), and the abnormal judgment number is determined based on the abnormal cancellation number satisfying the predetermined condition. The special figure 2 abnormal variation number which makes the above is to be updated (subtracted here) in the abnormal cancellation direction. Therefore, the game control apparatus 100 serves as abnormality determination number management means for updating the number of abnormality determinations in the direction of occurrence of abnormality based on the start of the non-main variation display game.

  If the number of abnormal fluctuations is not smaller than the specified value (step X390; N), the number of abnormal fluctuations is set to the specified value -1 (step X391), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is initialized to the initial value ( For example, 60000 ms) is set (step X392). Next, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X399. In this case, in spite of being in the normal gaming state (low probability state) where it is recommended that the player play the game mainly on the special view 1 variation display game by left-handling, the player makes the right In the case where the variable display game is being executed, processing for giving a notification prompting the player to hit the left is performed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal variation notification timer is updated by 1 (step X395), and it is determined whether time is up (step X396) ). When the time is not up (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is ended. When the time is up (step X396; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag is prepared (step X397), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is prepared (step X398).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (step X399). Then, if the prepared flag and the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area are the same (step X 399; Y), that is, there is no change in the state, the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process is ended. Also, if the prepared flag and the value of the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area are not the same (step X 399; N), that is, if there is a change in state, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag It is determined whether or not (step X400).

  If the prepared flag is not the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation flag (step X400; N), that is, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal variation flag area (step X402) The effect command setting process is performed, and the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, when the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation flag (step X400; Y), after the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X401), the processes of steps X402 and X403 are performed. (Step X403), the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is ended. By the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the detection of the special figure 2 abnormal variation, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command with the special figure 2 cancellation of the abnormal variation is the effect control device It is transmitted to 300, and the start and the end of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification are set.

  In FIG. 30, FIG. 31, an example about the process by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process accompanying advancing of a game was shown. In the example shown in FIG. 30, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is 3 and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is 15. When the next special view 1 variation display game is started from this state (t11), the special view 1 variation count changes from 15 to 16. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t12), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number changes from 3 to 4.

  After that, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation count is updated by +1 (t13, t14). Here, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches 18 which is the specified value (t14), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 to change from 4 to 3, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0. Ru. Similarly, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 variation number reaches 18 which is the specified value (t17), The special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated by 1 from -1 to 3 and changed to 2, and the special figure 1 variation number is cleared to zero. That is, every time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the specified number (here, 18 times) is executed, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted.

  FIG. 31 shows the case where the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed. In this example, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3 in the normal gaming state. When the special view 2 variation display game is started from this state (t21), the special view 2 abnormal variation count is updated from 3 to 4. Furthermore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches 5 which is a specified value.

  Thereby, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, the external information which shows that special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurs based on this flag and the output of the game machine error state signal to the device outside the game machine are started, It becomes possible to grasp occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation with the management device etc of the game arcade. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display, voice or the like. That is, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 form a response means for performing a predetermined response on the basis that the abnormality determination number (special figure 2 abnormality variation number) satisfies a predetermined condition (becomes a specified value).

  In addition, counting by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is started from the time when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches 5 which is the specified value (t22), and when a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses ( t23) The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error status signal is stopped. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 ends notification of the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation based on the reception of this command.

  The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to a prescribed value -1 (here 4) after it is determined that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by reaching a prescribed value (here, 5). Therefore, when the special figure 2 variation display game is newly started before the predetermined time elapses, the special figure 2 variation number becomes a specified value, and from that point in time counting of the predetermined time is newly started. Thus, when the special view 2 variation display game is executed despite the notification that the special view 2 abnormal variation has occurred, the period of the notification is extended accordingly.

  As described above, when it is determined that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred based on the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaching a prescribed value (for example, 5), for example, the game ball enters the right game area unintentionally When the second start winning opening 37 has been won, it can be prevented that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is immediately determined. Furthermore, the special figure 2 abnormal variation which occurred about the winning of the 2nd starting winning opening 37 which is not intended by having performed special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the specified number of times is made to subtract special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number The number will be eliminated if a game is played after that, and it can be prevented that a mere mistake or the result of the game of another player is accumulated and determined to be the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation.

  In addition, the special value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number which will perform the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification, and the special value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number which will perform the process of subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number are arbitrary. It can be set. Each predetermined value set here may be any value as long as the player can not aim for the start of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state. Also, if a power failure occurs and is restored, monitoring is resumed from the state before the power failure. In addition, even when special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation information is done, the prize balls are paid out normally for winning.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 32 shows a gaming machine state check process (steps X310, X312, X315) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine status check process, first, a status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is obtained (step X451), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table. As this information, for example, the lower address of the head address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal Judgment data of ON, state OFF command (make error notification end command in case of error system), state ON command (make error notification start command in case of error system), state OFF monitoring timer comparison value, state ON monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step X452: N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step X453), and the state off command of the target is acquired and prepared (step X454). Thereafter, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). If the target signal is not on (step X 452: N), it is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (is normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step X452: Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step X456), and the state on command of the target is acquired and prepared (step X457). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is on (step X 452: Y), it is a state indicating that the error signal is an error (abnormal or incorrect), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. Is a state showing

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step X459; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462) It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step X459; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X 460). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step X463).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. Further, when the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value is held at the value of -1 (step X464). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

  Then, if the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step X 465; Y), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the rendering command setting process is performed. Then (step X467), the gaming machine state check process is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 33 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). If the payout busy signal is on (step X 471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X 474), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X 475). .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, it is determined whether there is a change of on or off (step X476). If it is the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If not (step X476; N), save the state of the current signal in the busy signal state area (step X477), clear the busy signal monitoring timer to 0 (step X478), and save the busy signal monitoring timer. +1 is updated (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the on-determined monitoring timer comparison value or the off-determined monitoring timer comparison value set previously, that is, whether the signal determination time (for example, 32 ms) is reached (step X 480).
If the signal determination time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process is ended. Also, when the signal determination time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the value of -1 of the on determination monitoring timer comparison value or the off determination monitoring timer comparison value previously set. At step X481, the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step X482), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  By this processing, the busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, and the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and thus noise It is hard to be influenced by

  In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes indeterminate until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the starting opening 1 (first starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X492). Then, it is judged whether or not there is information on the starting opening winning combination set when the big hit random number is acquired based on the winning on the first starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquiring process (step X493).

  If the start-up winning combination information is not set based on the winning on the first start-up winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process moves to step X499. In this case, no starting opening winning combination information is set. On the other hand, if the start-up winning combination information has been set based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether a low probability is in progress (step X494). And when it is in low probability (step X494; Y), it transfers to step X497. If the low probability is not in progress (step X494; N), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step X495), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X496). Thereafter, a table for setting the information of suspension by the starting opening 1 is prepared (step X497), and the special view starting opening 1 switch processing is performed (step X498).

  In the effect control device 300, on the basis of the reception of the right strike instruction informing command, the right strike instruction informing the player to strike the right by display, voice or the like is performed. If the player is in the high probability state, it is advantageous for the player to hit the right, and the player can not win a prize if he does not hit the left. Right-handed indication notification is performed.

  Next, start opening 2 (second start winning opening 37) prepares a prize monitoring table (step X 499), performs hard random number acquisition processing (step X 500), and wins a big hit random number based on winning on second starting winning opening 37 It is determined whether there is information on the starting opening winning combination set when acquired (step X501).

  If the start-up winning combination information is not set based on the winning on the second start-up winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the start-up opening switch monitoring process is ended. In this case, no starting opening winning combination information is set. On the other hand, if the start-up winning combination information is set based on the winning on the second start-up winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether high probability is in progress (step X502). And when it is in high probability (step X502; Y), it transfers to step X507. If the game is not in high probability (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not the player is in the first special game state, which is a special game state based on the big hit, that is, the big hit.

  If the jackpot is in progress (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the jackpot is not in progress (step X503; N), it is determined whether the high probability final change is in progress (step X504). During high probability final fluctuation is during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (50 times here) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery in the high probability state The last special feature variation display game in which the was played is running.

  If the high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step X504; Y), the process moves to step X507. If the high probability final change is not in progress (step X504; N), a left-handed command notification command is prepared (step X505), and effect command setting processing is performed (step X506). Thereafter, a table for setting information on suspension by the starting opening 2 is prepared (step X507), the special view starting opening 2 switch processing is performed (step X508), and the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

  In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the left hitting instruction notification command, the left hitting instruction notification instructing the player to hit the left by display, voice or the like is performed. If the player is in the low probability state, it is advantageous for the player to hit the left, and the player can not win a prize unless the player hits the right. It is made to perform left hitting instruction notification.

  In the first special game state, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened except for a part of the big hit types, so that the left hit instruction notification is not performed even in the low probability state. Moreover, in the special figure fluctuation display game executed last in the high probability state, the state is changed to the low probability state after the lottery at the start of the game, and the game is in the low probability state during the game. Since the determination is made in the probability state, there is a high possibility that the special gaming state will occur, and the effect of the specific gaming state is not performed until the end of the game, so that the left hitting instruction notification is not performed.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
FIG. 35 shows the hard random number acquisition process (steps X492 and X500) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, start-up opening winning no information is set (step X511), and it is determined whether there is an input to a target switch (step X512).

  If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. If the target switch has an input (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded and prepared in the target hard random number latch register (step X515). Then, the start hole winning combination information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is ended.

[Special figure starting port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special view starting opening 1 switch processing (step X 498) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring processing. In this special view starting opening 1 switch processing, first, the starting opening signal 1 output number which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the first starting winning opening 36 to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded (Step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X523). Then, if the output number does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal 1 output number area (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, although the number of times of output can be stored up to 255, when it is stored up to the upper limit, the value is looped to 0 due to +1 updating, so saving of the value after updating is not performed.

  If the special figure 1 reservation number is less than the upper limit (4 in this case) (step X525; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of variation patterns in the special figure hold information determination process described later ( Step X526), the special figure 1 holding number is updated by +1 (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is calculated (step X 528), and the big hit random number prepared in the above hard random number acquisition processing is the big hit random number of RWM. Save in the storage area (step X529).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hitting symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in a fluctuation pattern random number storage area of RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, the special figure holding information determination process (step X534) which is the pre-reading process is performed, the decorative special figure holding number command corresponding to the special figure 1 holding number is prepared (step X535), and the effect command setting process is performed ( Step X536), The special view starting opening 1 switch processing ends. That is, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, and store the predetermined random number as the first start storage up to a predetermined upper limit number. Make a first start storage means.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
FIG. 37 shows the special view reservation information determination process (step X534) in the special view starting opening 1 switch process described above. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the special view 1 start storage prior to the start timing of the special view 1 change display game based on the special view 1 start storage. In the special view reserve information determination process, first, it is determined whether the high probability state is in progress (step X541). When the high probability state is in progress (step X541; Y), the special view reserve information determination process is ended. . If the high probability state is not in progress (step X541; N), it is determined whether the player is in the first special game state, which is a special game state based on the big hit, ie, a special game state based on the big hit (step X542).

  If the jackpot is in progress (step X 542: Y), the processing for determining the special image holding information ends. If the big hit is not in progress (step X542; N), a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit is determined by whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (step X543). Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table (step X545), and acquire stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number (step X546), The prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), small hit determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X547) ). Then, if the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information of the small hit is set (step X549), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), stop symbol information of the removal is set (step X550), and a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  After preparing the prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), rendering command setting processing is performed (step X552). Next, special figure 1 information setting processing (step X553) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and special figure 1 variation pattern setting for setting a variation aspect of the special figure 1 variation display game The process is performed (step X554).

  Then, the prefetch change pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view 1 fluctuation display game is prepared (step X555). The process is executed (step X556), and the special figure hold information determination process is ended. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of special figure 1 ordinary processing. Is the same as

  According to the above process, it includes a prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special view 1 change display game based on the special view 1 start storage, and information of change pattern in the special view 1 change display game based on the special view 1 start storage. The look-ahead fluctuation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetching result) of the result related information (whether or not the big hit or small hit or the variation pattern type) corresponding to the special figure 1 starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation based on the corresponding special figure 1 starting memory It is possible to notify the effect control device 300 before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decoration special view start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the start of the special view 1 variation display game As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the related information before the timing.

  That is, based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means, the game control apparatus 100 may determine the result of the first change display game and the change mode information before the start of the first change display game. It is the first possible means of determination. In addition, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start storage in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not (Determine whether or not etc.) Make an advance decision means It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

  In addition, this special view reservation information determination process is performed only for the special view 1 variable display game, and does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special view change display game. It does not happen. In addition, the prefetching process is not performed when the probability is high. This is a state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes the main during the high probability state, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is forcedly left out by deriving the special result in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game It is because it is almost always stopped. That is, there is little meaning in notifying the prefetching result because most are outliers, and it is forcibly changed to the outlier result after informing the prefetching result that is the special result in the special view 1 variable display game. Inconsistencies may arise.

  However, for the special view 2 change display game, since the start memory for holding the start of the special view 2 change display game is not generated, the special view 1 change is performed while there is the first start memory for the first period of the specific gaming state. There is a high possibility that only the display game will be played, and in such a case, the pre-reading effect may be performed for the first start memory. Among the first start memories that perform such pre-reading effects, pre-reading processing is performed for those that occur before the start of the specific gaming state, so using those results, for those that occur after the start of the specific gaming state The pre-reading process is performed on the subject of such pre-reading effect. Of course, the prefetching process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and another process may be performed to determine whether or not to perform the prefetching effect based on the result of the prefetching process.

[Special figure starting mouth 2 switch processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special view starting opening 2 switch processing (step X508) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring processing. In this special view starting opening 2 switch processing, first, the starting opening signal 2 output number of times which is the number of times of outputting information on the number of winnings to the second starting winning opening 37 to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step X563). Then, if the output number does not overflow (step X563; N), save the updated value in the start opening signal 2 output number area of RWM (step X 564) and start opening 2 (second start winning opening 37) winning combination Determine if it is invalid.

  In the starting opening 2 winning a prize ineffective, during the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation indication game which becomes special result (the big hit or the small hit) (during processing during the special figure indication which is mentioned later), during the 1st or 2nd special game state and The special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. When the starting opening 2 winning combination is ineffective (step X 565; Y), the special view starting opening 2 switch processing is ended. If the start opening 2 winning combination is not ineffective (step X565; N), set the number of special figure 2 reservations to 1 (step X566) and calculate the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 (step X567) The jackpot random number prepared in the above-described hard random number acquisition processing is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Furthermore, the small hitting symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special view starting opening 2 switch process is ended. That is, based on the inflow of gaming balls to the second start winning opening 37, the game control device 100 forms a start winning storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number. In the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern random number 1 is not used because there are few types of variation patterns.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special view 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 1 are performed. In this special figure 1 game process, first, during the special game state which is executed under the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the big hit or the small hit. It is determined whether or not (step Y101).

  If the special figure 2 is not big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y103) ). Moreover, when it is during the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 (step Y101; Y), it transfers to step Y103.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39 Perform processing to monitor detection. In special figure 1 game processing, special winning opening switch monitor processing is performed for the special gaming state executed based on the result of special figure 1 fluctuation display game becoming big hit or small hit, special figure 2 fluctuation display The special game state to be executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit is performed a special winning opening switch monitoring process in the special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special view 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special processing 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the processing proceeds to step Y119 and the subsequent processing is performed. In addition, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special view 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special view 1 game process number is made (step Y107).

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, the setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special Special processing 1 usual processing (step Y108) which sets the information which is necessary in order to do processing in Figure 1 during fluctuation is done. At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “1”, the special figure 1 setting of the stop display time, the special figure 1 for performing the setting of the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 1 etc. 1) Perform a process during fluctuation (step Y109).

  If the special figure 1 game processing number is "2" at step Y107, and if the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the setting of fanfare command according to the type of big hit, each big hit type The special figure 1 display process (step Y110) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the special winning opening pattern, set the information necessary to perform the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

  If the special processing 1 game processing number is "3" at step Y107, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the opening number, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform fanfare / during interval processing (step Y111). If the special figure 1 game processing number is "4" in step Y107, while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, if it is the final round, the processing for setting the ending command, or the special winning opening A special winning opening open process (step Y112) is performed to set information required to perform the remaining ball process.

  At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, Special figure 1 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y113) is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process. At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) to perform setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108), etc. I do.

  In step Y107, when the special processing 1 game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing The small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y115) is performed to set the information necessary for the above. If the special processing 1 game processing number is "8" in step Y107, the small hitting middle processing (step Y116) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing. Do.

  At step Y107, when the special processing 1 game processing number is "9", the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle processing, the small hit end A small hit remaining ball process (step Y117) is performed to set information required to perform the process. At step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing special figure 1 ordinary processing.

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and symbol fluctuation control processing (step Y120) according to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 The game process ends. The special figure 1 game process is a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special figure 2 game processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special view 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and the setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

  In this special figure 2 game process, first, during the special game state which is executed under the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1, that is, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes the big hit or the small hit. It is determined whether it is (step Y131). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step Y131; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated to -1 if it is not 0 Step Y133). Moreover, when it is during the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y131; Y), it transfers to step Y133.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39 Perform processing to monitor detection. In special figure 2 game processing, it is made to do big winning a prize mouth switch supervisory processing concerning the special game state which is executed when the result of special figure 2 variable indication game becomes big hit or small hit, special figure 1 variable indication In the special game state to be executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 1 game process described above.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the special view 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y 134; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, is the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer 0? Is determined (step Y135).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is long. The fluctuation timer value (in this case, 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

  In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variation display game with a high probability of occurrence of small hits in the normal gaming state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state is a very long time (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at one time even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by plural times of counting using the number of repetitions which is the number of times of counting the specified time (here, 60000 ms).

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register (Step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y137), and the subroutine call by the special figure 2 game process number is made (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is “0” in step Y 138, the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the setting and effect setting of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, Special figure 2 usual processing (step Y139) which does the setting etc of the information which is necessary in order to do processing in Figure 2 fluctuation is done. If the special figure 2 game processing number is “1” in step Y 138, the special figure 2 is used to set the stop display time and to set the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2) Perform a process during fluctuation (step Y140).

  If the special figure 2 game processing number is "2" at step Y138, and if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, the setting of fanfare command according to the type of big hit, each big hit type The special figure 2 display process (step Y141) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the special winning opening pattern, set the information necessary to perform the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

  If the special processing 2 game processing number is "3" at step Y138, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. Perform fanfare / during interval processing (step Y142). At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing for setting the ending command in the final round, or the special winning opening A special winning opening open process (step Y143) is performed to set information required to perform the remaining ball process.

  At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the special figure 2 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process. If the special figure 2 game process number is "6" in step Y138, the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) is performed to set information etc. necessary to perform the special figure 2 routine process (step Y108). I do.

  When special figure 2 game processing number is “7” in step Y138, setting of opening time and opening pattern of big winning opening when small hit occurs, setting of fanfare command, and processing during small hit The small hit fanfare middle process (step Y146) is performed to set the necessary information. If the special processing 2 game processing number is "8" in step Y138, the small hitting middle processing (step Y147) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing. Do.

  At step Y138, when the special processing 2 game processing number is "9", the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle processing, the small hit end A small hit remaining ball process (step Y148) is performed to set information required to perform the process. At step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) is performed to set information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing.

  Thereafter, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and symbol fluctuation control processing (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. The game process is ended. This special view 2 game process is a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game (special view 2 variable display game). The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 41 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102 and Y132) in the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process described above. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) is open (step Y161). Then, if the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. If the upper large winning opening is not open (step Y161; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball processing of the upper large winning opening is in progress (step Y162). The residual ball processing in this determination includes both the big winning opening residual ball processing based on the big hit and the small hit residual ball processing based on the small hit.

  When the remaining ball processing of the upper large winning a prize mouth is in progress (step Y162; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. In addition, when remaining ball processing of upper large winning a prize mouth is not under (step Y162; N), it judges whether or not lower large winning a prize mouth (the 2nd special fluctuation winning a prize device 39) is open (step Y163). Then, if the lower large winning opening is not open (step Y163; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the lower large winning opening is open (step Y163; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower large winning opening switch (step Y164).

  Note that opening in steps Y161 and Y163 means opening in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit), and a special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit) Including both being open in the second special game state. Further, the determination in steps Y161 to Y163 may be made with reference to the special view 1 or special view 2 game processing number, or flags may be set to indicate whether they are in the respective states, It may be determined based on this flag.

  When there is no input on the lower large winning opening switch (step Y 164; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when there is an input on the lower large winning opening switch (step Y 164; Y), 1 is set to the winning counter for counting the number of winning to the special winning opening added in the current special winning opening switch monitoring process (Step Y165), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

  On the other hand, if the upper large winning opening is open (step Y161; Y) or if the remaining large ball opening is being processed (step Y162; Y), the winning counter is set to 0 in step Y166. Set (step Y166). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is an input on the upper large winning opening switch 1 (one upper large winning opening switch 38a) (step Y167), and if there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

  If the upper prize winning opening switch 1 has an input (step Y167; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step Y168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variation winning device 38, a special winning opening count command is transmitted to produce effects by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether there is an input on the upper large winning opening switch 2 (the other upper large winning opening switch 38a) (step Y171).

  Then, if there is no input on the upper large winning opening switch 2 (step Y171; N), it proceeds to step Y175. If the upper prize winning opening switch 2 has an input (step Y171; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step Y172), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y173). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

  Thereafter, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y176; Y) or when the small hitting remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y177; Y) If it is any of the above, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y 175; N), the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y 176; N), and the small hitting remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y 177; N) The value of the counter is added to the special winning opening count number (step Y178), and it is determined whether the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (here, 9) (step Y179; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the special winning opening count is limited to the upper limit (step Y180), and the target figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot is open during the big hit, that is, whether it is the opening in the first special game state which is the special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

  If the jackpot is not open (step Y 182; N), that is, if the jackpot is open, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the jackpot is being opened (step Y182; Y), the value of the big hit opening operation end is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

  In addition, when there is an input on the lower large winning opening switch (step Y 164; Y), a large winning opening count command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 as well. In addition, when there is a remaining ball processing for the lower winning prize opening, a special winning opening count command is sent to the effect control device 300 even when the lower winning prize opening switch is input during the remaining ball processing. You may

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201). The state in which the special view 1 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not between the stop of fluctuation of the special view 2 fluctuation display game which is a big hit or a small hit and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that although the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game is in a state where fluctuation can not be started, in that case, special figure 1 normal processing is not being executed. , Here, it is not necessary to judge about this.

  If the special figure 1 can not start changing (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 routine process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 routine process is ended. If the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handling instruction notification has been made, that is, whether the left-handling instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left hit instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process moves to step Y206. If the left hit instruction notification has not been made (step Y202; N), a left hit instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y204). After that, the left hitting indication notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the number of special drawing 1 reservations is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when the special view variation display game last performed in the specific gaming state, which is the high probability state, is ended, and thereby the normal gaming state, which is the low probability state When shifting to the left, a left hitting instruction notification is performed.

  And when the number of special drawing 1 reservations is 0 (Step Y206; Y), it shifts to Step Y217. If the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y208). Thereafter, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed to set information on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (step Y210), and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step Y211) , Effect command setting processing (step Y212). In addition, at the time of performing processing (step Y210) for preparing the decoration special figure reservation number command, subtraction of the special figure 1 reservation number based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 reservation is held. A number-of-holds command corresponding to the special view 1 number of holds minus 1 is prepared.

  Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y212). Here, the special view status indicates the state of the special view variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates that only the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, The special view status 2 indicates that only the special view 2 variation display game is being executed. Further, the special view status 3 indicates that both the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are being executed, and the special view status 4 is a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. The special view status 5 indicates that the special game state is a second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special view 1 variation display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special view status.

  Next, it is determined whether it is in the high probability state (step Y213). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y213; Y), it transfers to step Y216. If the high probability state is not in progress (step Y213; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y214). During high probability final fluctuation is during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (50 times here) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery in the high probability state The last special feature variation display game in which the was played is running.

  If it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the high probability final change is not in progress (step Y214; N), the special view 1 change check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special view 1 variation display game is started in the low probability state, the special view 1 variation check flag is set. Thereafter, special processing 1 during fluctuation processing transition setting processing is performed (step Y216), and special processing 1 normal processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 43 shows the special figure 2 routine process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221). The state in which the special view 2 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not between the stop of fluctuation of the special view 1 fluctuation display game which is a big hit or small hit and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game is in a state where it can not start changing, in that case it is a state where special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , Here, it is not necessary to judge about this.

  If the special figure 2 can not start changing (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 routine processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 routine processing is ended. If the special figure 2 can start changing (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 reserve number is 0 (step Y222). In addition, as mentioned above, special figure 2 suspension (the 2nd starting memory) is based on the particular winning a prize when there is a winning to the 2nd starting winning a prize opening 37 in the state which can start the special figure 2 fluctuation indicatory game It is temporarily generated to perform start processing of the special view 2 variable display game, and is not for holding the start of the special view change display game as in the first start storage.

  Then, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, special figure 2 variation start processing is performed to set information etc. regarding the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y225), and the special figure 2 variation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Here, since the special view 2 variation display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special view status.

  Next, it is determined whether it is in the high probability state (step Y227). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y227; Y), it transfers to step Y230. If not in the high probability state (step Y227; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y228). During high probability final fluctuation is during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (50 times here) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery in the high probability state The last special feature variation display game in which the was played is running.

  If it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step Y228; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If the high probability final change is not in progress (step Y228; N), the special view 2 change check flag is set (step Y229). That is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in the low probability state, the special figure 2 variation check flag is set. Thereafter, special processing 2 variation processing transition setting processing is performed (step Y230), and the special processing 2 routine processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reserve number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reserve number is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y 231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is in the process of change (step Y 232). Then, if the special figure 1 is not moving (step Y232; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233), and if it is not disclosed (step Y233; N), it is in the customer waiting state Perform processing related to setting. In addition, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (step Y 231; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y 232; Y) or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y 233; Y) , Step Y237.

  In the processing for setting the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y234), and the customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235). A command setting process is performed (step Y236), and the process moves to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it becomes possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

  In addition, when the effect control device 300 is restarted due to any cause, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information of the gaming state, so that it is not possible to perform appropriate effects, but the customer By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform effects according to the gaming state from the reception of this command, and it is possible that the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state is transmitted. It is possible to return to the effect according to the game state earlier than waiting.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be simultaneously executed, and it is also conceivable that the probability state changes due to the processing for the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special view variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). Thus, the effect control device 300 can perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

  In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command at each start of the special view fluctuation display game, even when the effect control device 300 is restarted, from the reception of this command, an effect according to the gaming state is performed. It is possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state more quickly than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state to be transmitted. The customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for enabling the effect to be returned to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 normal process described above. This special view 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special view 1 change display game. First, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and outlier information as result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y 242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y 243) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set 1 Information setting process (step Y 244) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding setting of fluctuation patterns of the special drawing 1 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y245).

  Thereafter, special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step Y246) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting information of fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game The process (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Then, after that, a process is performed to adjust so as not to cause an inconvenience between the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game that can be executed simultaneously.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived on the other hand, the other is forced to leave regardless of the lottery result. It is supposed to end as a result. In particular, since the special figure 2 variation display game always becomes a big hit or a small hit, when the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped first, such processing is performed for the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, for example, although rendering with a high degree of expectation is performed in the special view 1 variation display game, the player is forced to be stopped as a result of the disconnection, and the player has a sense of distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game may end before the end of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started from now, it is possible to take measures such as not to select an effect with high expectation. It is like that.

  For this purpose, it is first determined whether or not the high probability state is in progress (step Y248), and if it is in the high probability state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. When it is a high probability state, it is a state which advances a game mainly on a special figure 2 change display game. In this state, since the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is short and executed with high frequency, it is known that the special figure 1 variation display game has a high possibility of being forcibly stopped by the result of the disconnection. In the special view 1 variation display game, special processing is not performed here because it is preset so that a high expectation effect is not selected.

  If the state is not in the high probability state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y249). During high probability final fluctuation is during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (50 times here) from the end of the first special game state (including the stop time), and the lottery in the high probability state The last special feature variation display game in which the was played is running.

  If it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step Y 249; Y), the process proceeds to step Y 257. Since the special figure 2 variation display game which is the high probability final variation is stopped in a short time, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now is forcibly stopped in a short time. Therefore, even if an effect with a high degree of expectation is selected for the special view 1 fluctuation display game, the process ends before the start of the effect, so here, the process for preventing the effect with a high degree of expectation from being selected Do not do.

  If the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step Y249; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is in fluctuation (step Y250). When the special figure 2 is not changing (step Y250; N), it transfers to step Y257. In this case, since the low probability state is set, even if the special view 2 variation display game is started from now on, the variation time of the special view 2 variation display game becomes a very long change time. Therefore, since the possibility that the special view 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped is low, the process for preventing the selection of the effect having a high degree of expectation is not performed here.

  When the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250; Y), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is four or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is ended earlier, so that the effect with a high degree of expectation is not selected. Do not process.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y 252; N), the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated (step Y 253), and the special figure 1 variation display to be executed from now is It is determined whether the variation time of the game is less than the remaining variation time of the special view 2 variation display game (step Y254). If the variation time of the special view 1 variation display game to be executed is less than the remaining variation time of the special view 2 variation display game (step Y254; Y), the process moves to step Y257. In this case, since the special view 1 variation display game is ended earlier, the process for preventing the effect having a high degree of expectation from being selected is not performed.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed from now is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), it notifies that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y256). Thereafter, high probability change number of times update processing is performed to manage the period in which the high probability state is set (step Y257), and the special view 1 change start processing is ended. In the effect control device 300, based on receiving a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer, processing such as restricting selection of an effect with a high degree of expectation for the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. It is supposed to be done.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed from now is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), it is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) A process of resetting information related to the fluctuation pattern (front / rear fluctuation pattern number or the like) may be performed to change the effect control device 300 to a fluctuation pattern not selecting a high expectation effect. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process (step Y255) of preparing a command to notify that the fluctuation time in the special view 1 is longer may be performed or may not be performed.

  That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern process (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100 is for the second fluctuation display game when the fluctuation mode information including the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display game is determined in the normal gaming state. The first variation mode determination means can determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Furthermore, the process of resetting the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is a second fluctuation display game when the fluctuation mode information including the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display game is determined by the first fluctuation mode determining means. Is being executed, information on the variation pattern is determined without changing the determined variation time of the first variation display game with reference to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game. The second variation mode determining means can be redetermined.

  Also, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern determined once in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed from now on when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) A process of determining whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y254), and the fluctuation pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning You may do so.

  In addition, when it is possible to select the outlier result as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now only when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a special result A process (step Y254) of determining whether it is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is performed. When the result of the special view 2 variable display game is out, this processing is not necessary because the special view 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped by the result of the release.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y 225) in the special figure 2 normal process described above. The special view 2 change start process is a process performed at the start of the special view 2 change display game. First, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and outlier information as result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y 262) is performed to set the big hit information or the small hit information.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. 2 Information setting process (step Y 264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding setting of fluctuation patterns of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y265).

  Thereafter, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting information of fluctuation start of special figure 2 fluctuation display game The process (step Y 267) is performed. By these processes, the result and fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Thereafter, high probability change number of times update processing is performed to manage the period in which the high probability state is set (step Y268), and the special view 2 change start processing is ended.

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, a process for adjusting the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which can be executed simultaneously, so as not to cause inconvenience is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special view 1 variation display game is low, so there are few opportunities for the special view 2 variation display game to be forcibly ended by the result of the removal. However, as in the case of the special view 1 variation display game, when the game is forcibly stopped by the result of out-of-range, the selection of the rendering with a high degree of expectation may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
FIG. 46 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y 242) in the special drawing 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y 271), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y 272). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) of RWM and prepared (step Y 273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being executed is a big hit (step Y 275), and if it is a big hit (step Y 275; Y), it proceeds to step Y 279 Do. That is, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed simultaneously are not considered to be a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y 275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y 276) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained big hit random number matches the big hit determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is a big hit (step Y277; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether the obtained big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not The small hit determination process (step Y279) is performed.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area in which the outlier information is saved in step Y271. (Step Y281), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. In this case, outlier information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
FIG. 47 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y 291), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y 292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area of RWM and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area is cleared to 0.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game being executed is a big hit (step Y 295), and if it is a big hit (step Y 295; Y), it proceeds to step Y 299 Do. That is, both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game executed simultaneously are not considered to be a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y 295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y 296) is performed to determine whether or not the obtained big hit random number matches the big hit determination value.

  Then, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y 296) is a big hit (step Y 297; Y), the big hit information is saved by overwriting the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 area saved with the out information at step Y 292 (step Y 298) ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y 296) is not a big hit (step Y 297; N), whether or not the obtained big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether the small hit judgment value matches. Small hit determination processing (step Y 299) to determine

  Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y 299) is a small hit (step Y 300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the outlier information is saved in step Y 291 and saved. (Step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. In this case, outlier information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 48 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276 and Y296) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this big hit determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, a judgment result is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. In addition, with the omission as a judgment result, it shows that it fell out to the lottery of the big hit. If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step Y313).

  Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step Y316). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step Y313; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316) .

  If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as a judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step Y318), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 49 shows small hit determination processing (steps Y279 and Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting processing and big hit flag 2 setting processing. In this small hitting determination process, it is first determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hitting lower limit judgment value (step Y321). Note that being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is not higher than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a gap is set as the judgment result (step Y326) and the small hit judgment processing is ended. In addition, with the result as a judgment result, it shows that it fell out to the lottery of a small hit. Also, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y 321; N), it is judged whether the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed, that is, the judgment about the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (Step Y322).

  Then, when the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step Y322; Y), the small hitting upper limit judgment value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), the value of the target big hit random number is the small hitting upper limit judgment value It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Also, when the information setting of the special figure 1 is not being performed (step Y322; N), that is, when it is the determination about the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the small hitting upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324) It is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the small hitting upper limit judgment value (step Y 325).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the judgment result (step Y326), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y 325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step Y 327) and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. The special symbol 1 variation display game is saved not in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area but in the special symbol 1 stop symbol evacuation area when the special result is derived in the special figure 2 variation display game There is a possibility that it will be forced to be changed to the result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y 337), and the special winning opening open information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired The special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is saved (step Y 338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339). If it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this process. Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special view 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and the decorative special view 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y 339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y 344), and the off stop symbol pattern is special figure 1 stop The symbol pattern area is saved (step Y345), and the decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 1 command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and effect command setting processing (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 349), and the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y 350). One small hit symbol random number storage area (for number of reservations 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y 351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed for the special figure 2 as a target. In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y 361), and if it is a big hit (step Y 361; Y), the big hit symbol random number from the special symbol 2 big hit symbol storage area Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step Y363), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired and it saves in the special figure 2 stop design evacuation territory (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the special symbol 2 variation display game is saved not in the special symbol 2 stop symbol region but in the special symbol 2 stop symbol withdrawal region when the special result is derived in the special symbol 1 variation display game There is a possibility that it will be forced to be changed to the result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the special winning opening open information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired It saves in the special figure 2 large winning a prize opening opening information field (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y 361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y 369). If it is a small hit (step Y 369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this process. Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special view 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and the decorative special view 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y 369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (step Y 374), and the off stop symbol pattern is special figure 2 stop The symbol pattern area is saved (step Y 375), and the decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y 376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 2 command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and effect command setting processing (step Y378) is performed. This decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), and the special figure 2 big hit design random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380). The area is cleared to 0 (step Y 381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special view 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether high probability is in progress (step Y401). If it is not in high probability (step Y401; N), set the variation pattern selection information table (step Y402) and acquire the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern (step Y403) It is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

  When it is special figure 1 big hit (step Y404; Y), it moves to step Y412. If the special figure 1 big hit is not detected (step Y404; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y405). Then, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is a release, the process proceeds to step Y407. When the special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; Y), the special figure 1 reserve number is added to the latter half offset data to update the value (step Y406), and the special figure 1 reserve number is for the first half offset data. The values are added and converted (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

  On the other hand, when it is in the high probability (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether it is the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408). Then, when the special figure 1 big hit is not (step Y408; N), set the first half offset data for high probability special figure 1 shift and small hit (step Y409), and set the second half offset data for special figure 1 length fluctuation. It sets (step Y411). If the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), set the first half offset data for high probability special figure 1 big hit (step Y410), set the second half offset data for special figure 1 length fluctuation (Step Y411).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the second half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413). End the setting process.

  That is, in the special game 1 variation display game in the normal gaming state, in the case of a small hit, a variation pattern taking into consideration the number of reserved special figures 1 is determined for both the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern. In the first half, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 reserve number, and in the case of the big hit, the variation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 reserve number. Further, in the special view 1 change display game in the specific gaming state, the change pattern is determined without considering the special view 1 reservation number.

[Special figure 2 information setting processing]
FIG. 53 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y 264) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special view 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether high probability is in progress (step Y421). If it is in high probability (step Y421; Y), set the variation pattern selection information table (step Y422) and acquire the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern (step Y423) ), Step Y428 follows.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability (step Y421; N), it is judged whether it is the special figure 2 big hit (step Y424). Then, when it is not the special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; N), set the first half offset data for low probability special figure 2 off-set / small hit (step Y425), and set the second half offset data for special figure 2 length fluctuation. It sets (step Y427). If the special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y), set the first half offset data for low probability special figure 2 big hit (step Y426), set the second half offset data for special figure 2 length fluctuation (Step Y427).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), and the second half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429). End the setting process.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

  In this special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452) Then, the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) of Special Figure 1 and prepared (step Y453).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is dislocated, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the dislocated stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and when the special figure 1 is dislocated (step Y454; Y), 2-byte distribution processing is performed (Step Y455), it transfers to step Y457. If the special figure 1 is not deviated (step Y454; N), distribution processing is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but when the result is a release, the distribution value is 2 bytes in order to enable various effects.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y 457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for number of reservations 1) of Special Figure 1. Prepare (step Y 458). Then, distribution processing (step Y459) is performed, and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step Y460). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) of Special Figure 1. Prepare (step Y464).

  Thereafter, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and saved in the first half fluctuation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process is ended. By this processing, the former half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the second half fluctuation selection address table is set (step Y 471), and the address of the second half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y 472) Then, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 and prepared (step Y 473).

  Next, distribution processing is performed (step Y 474), and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step Y 475). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Then, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y476), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y477). Next, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y 478), and variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of Toku 2 and prepared (step Y 479) ).

  Thereafter, distribution processing (step Y480) is performed, the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first-half fluctuation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the entire period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started from now is set. In the special figure 2 variation display game, since there are few types of second half variation, the second half variation group is not selected by the variation pattern random number 1, and the variation pattern is determined using only the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3.

[2-byte distribution process]
FIG. 56 shows 2-byte distribution processing (step Y455) in the special drawing 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing described above. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second half change group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step Y501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern group, but defines the second half fluctuation pattern group in which only the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach". In the variation group table, since there is no need for sorting, a sorting value “0”, that is, a code without sorting is specified at the top.

  Then, if the first data of the second half fluctuation group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the first data of the latter half fluctuation group table is not a code without distribution (step Y502; N), one distribution value defined first in the latter half fluctuation group table is acquired (step Y503).

  Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y 373 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y 504), and the calculated new random number value Is smaller than "0" (step Y505). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distributed value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value defined next in the variation group selection table is obtained in step Y503, the distribution value is subtracted by using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step Y505, and further new disturbance A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than "0" (step Y505).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the second half fluctuation group table. When it is determined in step Y505 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step Y507), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 57 shows the distribution process (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process described above. In the distribution process, the second half variation pattern of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether the head data of the prepared second half change selection table (selection table) or the first half change selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, "0"). (Step Y511). Here, the second-half fluctuation selection table and the first-half fluctuation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half fluctuation pattern or first-half fluctuation pattern as in the second-half fluctuation group table. In the case of a selection table without any, the distribution value "0", that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step Y512; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step Y517), End the process. On the other hand, when the first data of the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value defined first in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table To obtain (step Y513).

  Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y513 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) (step Y514), and then the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process proceeds to step Y513, and the subsequent steps Do the processing.

  That is, after the distribution value defined next in the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table is obtained in step Y513, the divided random value is determined as a new random number value and the distribution value is subtracted in step Y515. , And further calculate new random numbers (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (step Y515).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y). Thus, any one of the second-half fluctuation number and the first-half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second-half fluctuation pattern or the first-half fluctuation pattern defined in the second-half fluctuation selection table or the first-half fluctuation selection table. Then, if it is determined in step Y515 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step Y517), and the distribution processing is ended. Do.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 58 shows fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y247 and Y267) in the special drawing 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing described above. In this variation start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y551), and when the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y551; Y), The random number storage area (for holding number 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). When the information setting in the special figure 1 is not being performed (step Y551; N), that is, when the information setting in the special figure 2 is being performed, the random number storage area of the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 in the special figure 2 is cleared (step Y553).

  Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step Y558), and the addition value is saved in the target figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

  In the special game 2 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, when the result is out or small hit, a long fluctuation having a very long fluctuation time is set. In this case, using the number of repetitions which is the number of times to count a specified time (here, 60000 ms) as the above added value, the remainder time (time less than 60000 ms) excluding the time that can be timed is calculated as the added value It is supposed to be

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y560), and when the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y560; Y), the process moves to step Y564. If the information setting in the special view 1 is not in progress (step Y560; N), that is, if the information setting in the special view 2 is in progress, it is determined whether the start of the long variation in the special view 2 is (step Y561). The long fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern which is set when the result is out of the normal game state or a small hit in the special view 2 fluctuation display game, and it is judged by the number of the fluctuation pattern which is set.

  Then, if it is not the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the process proceeds to step Y564. Further, if the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

  Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y564), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y566) ). Next, it is determined whether the information setting of the special view 1 is being performed (step Y567), and when the information setting of the special view 1 is not being performed (step Y567; N), the variation start information setting process is ended. In addition, when the information setting of the special figure 1 is being performed (step Y 567; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number is updated by −1 (step Y 568), and the contents of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 are shifted (step Y 569) And clears the free space after shift (step Y 570), and ends the variation start information setting process.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means, the game control apparatus 100 determines the result of the first variable display game (special view 1 variable display game) and the fluctuation mode information as the first fluctuation display game. The first means of determination that can be determined before the start of Further, the game control apparatus 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37, and the result of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the predetermined random number. And variation aspect information as a second determination means capable of being determined before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is disposed at a position where the game ball fired to one side of the gaming area 32 can be won, and the second starting winning opening 37 is released to the other side of the gaming area 32 The game ball is disposed at a position where winning is possible, and the fluctuation mode information of the fluctuation display game includes information on fluctuation time that can specify the execution time of the fluctuation display game, and in the normal state (normal gaming state) The fluctuation time which can be determined as the fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display game by the second determination means is more than the fluctuation time which can be determined as the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display game by the first determination means It will be long.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game For example, a variation command including information on a pattern may be mentioned. In addition, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing. Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . Moreover, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and fluctuation mode information of the first fluctuation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and fluctuation mode information of the second fluctuation display game determined by the second determination means As transmission means that can be transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300). In addition, for each of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time in response to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time exceeds the fluctuation time. It serves as a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

  In the special game 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, when the result is out of place or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set, but in this case, the variation is Information on time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, but a command indicating only long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of the long fluctuation, it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail as long as the fluctuation display is simply performed. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the fluctuation display based on the reception of the command indicating the long fluctuation. Management of the fluctuation time is performed only with the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the fluctuation display based on the reception of the stop command. To do. In this way, the burden of control in the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[High probability change frequency update processing]
FIG. 59 shows the high probability change number updating process (steps Y 257 and Y 268) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the high probability change number update process, first, it is determined whether the high probability is in progress (step Y581). When the high probability change is not in progress (step Y581; N), the high probability change number update process is ended. Also, if the high probability is in progress (step Y581; Y), the high probability fluctuation number of managing the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the high probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and the high probability fluctuation number Is judged to be 0 (step Y 583).

  If the high probability fluctuation number is not 0 (step Y 583; N), that is, if the high probability state continues, the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. When the high probability fluctuation number is 0 (step Y 583; Y), that is, when the high probability state is ended, the signal regarding the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y 584). Here, it is set to turn off the jackpot 2 signal. Further, the signals relating to the high probability state and the end of the short time are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF.

  Further, the number in the low probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). Then, the high probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to the symbol whose fluctuation starts is set (step Y 588), and the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the high probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special gaming state, but the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display Since the game can be executed simultaneously, the high probability change number update process of managing the number of high probability states is performed at the start of the special figure change display game. As in the prior art, in the case of a gaming machine in which one special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed while the other special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the probability state is There is no problem if you change to a low probability state. However, when it is possible to execute the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is low when the special view variation display game is finished a predetermined number of times. If changing to the state, the determination is also made in the high probability state until the other special figure fluctuation display game started during the execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, and the high probability over a predetermined number of times It becomes possible to execute the game in the state. Therefore, when it is possible to simultaneously execute the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one special figure fluctuation display game, which is a predetermined number of times, is in high probability state After the determination, it is necessary to set the low probability state before the start of the other special figure variation display game, and here, immediately after the processing at the start of the one special figure variation display game which is the predetermined number of times is completed. It is possible to change to the low probability state.

  As described above, since the high probability change number of times update process is performed at the start of the special figure change display game, the last special figure change display game for which the lottery in the high probability state is performed is the change of the special figure change display game. The display is already in a low probability state. Therefore, if other processes perform processing with reference to the actual probability state during the variable display of the special figure fluctuation display game, processing may be performed as a low probability state, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the high probability final change flag is set to enable the special view change display game to be treated as a game being executed as a high probability state. Also, the high probability final change flag is information that can be used to determine whether the last special view change display game for which the lottery in the high probability state is performed is the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game. Contains.

[Special figure 1 during process transition setting process]
FIG. 60 shows the process shift setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 during special figure 1 processing. In this special figure 1 during process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51 blinker timer) in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step Y605). For example, 100 ms is set (step Y606). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 in-change symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 in-change processing transition setting process is ended.

  During the special figure 1 variation, the initial value to be set in the symbol number area is 0, so that the variation indication is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state in which the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state in which all the segments are turned off.

[Special figure 2 during process transition setting process]
In FIG. 61, the special figure 2 during fluctuation process setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 normal process is shown. In the special figure 2 in-process change processing setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, save the flag during fluctuation in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y 615), the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) For example, 100 ms is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set to the special figure 2 in-change symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 in-change processing transition setting process is ended.

  During the special figure 2 variation, the initial value to be set in the symbol number area is 0, so that the variation display is started from the state in which all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state in which the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state in which all the segments are turned off.

  When the variable display is started on the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, it is assumed that all segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode in any of the result modes, or if there is a segment not used in any of the result modes, the variable display is started from the state of lighting at least the segment You may do it. Also, the variable display may be started from the state in which the same one segment is always lighted each time. Moreover, the lighting aspect at the time of starting a fluctuation | variation with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be same or different.

[Process during special figure 1 change]
FIG. 62 shows the special figure 1 during fluctuation process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 fluctuation process, first, the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by +1 (step Y 621), and a command is loaded from the special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y 622). Perform (step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y 624), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y 625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is also a case where the game is forcibly stopped earlier than the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, so when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is sent to the effect control device 300 .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the final change of high probability (step Y626). When the special figure 1 variation display game is the final variation with high probability, the high probability final variation flag of special figure 1 is set. Then, if it is not the final change of the high probability (step Y626; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629. If the final change is a high probability (step Y 626; Y), the display time for the high probability final change is set (step Y 628), and the process moves to step Y 629. In addition, as a display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game set here, when it is not a high probability final fluctuation, 600 ms in the case of loss, 2000 ms in the big hit, 136 ms in the small hit The display time of is set. Also, in the case of the high probability final fluctuation, the display time of 7000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is off, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is off (step Y629). If the special figure 1 deviates (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure 1 does not deviate (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed (step Y630). Note that whether or not the special view 2 variation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special view status.

  And when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), it moves to step Y640. When the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 display process is in progress (step Y631). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 1 variable display game becoming a special result, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forced to be stopped at the out result. In addition, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has already ended the fluctuation display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it becomes the target of the forced stop.

  If the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y 631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y 633. If the special figure 2 is not being processed (step Y 631; N), the number of symbol determination times output is updated by 1 (step Y 632), and the special figure 1 display time set above as the special figure 2 display time A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special view 1 + 4 ms as the display time of the special view 2, the display times of the special view 1 and the special view 2 simultaneously end. In addition, even when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started.

  Next, save the display time in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y 634), load and prepare a command from the decorative special view 2 command area (step Y 635), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y 636). ). Thereafter, the decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y638), and special figure 2 display process transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y639).

  Then, load the command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and save it in the hit symbol command area (step Y 640), and whether it is the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is the small hit Is determined (step Y641). When it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), it transfers to step Y644. Also, when the special figure 1 small hit (step Y 641; N), ie, when it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y 642) ), Information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y 644), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y 645). End processing while displaying.

[Special figure 2 during processing]
FIG. 63 shows the special figure 2 during fluctuation process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 fluctuation process, first, the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by +1 (step Y651), and the special figure 2 command is loaded from the command area and prepared (step Y652). Perform (step Y653).

  Next, the decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y655). Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the final change of high probability (step Y656). When the special figure 2 variation display game is the final variation with high probability, the high probability final variation flag of the special figure 2 is set.

  Then, if it is not the final change of the high probability (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. If it is the final variation with high probability (step Y 656; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final variation is set (step Y 658), and the process shifts to step Y 659. In addition, as a display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game set here, 600 ms regardless of the result when it is not the high probability final fluctuation, regardless of the result regardless of the result regardless of the result The display time of 7000 ms is set.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is off, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a removal (step Y659). When the special figure 2 deviates (step Y659; Y), it transfers to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not deviated (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is also being executed (step Y660). Note that whether or not the special view 1 variation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special view status.

  And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation indicatory game is not under execution (step Y660; Y), it moves to step Y670. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display is being processed (step Y661). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 2 variable display game becoming a special result, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forced to be stopped at the out result. In addition, even if the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has already ended the fluctuation display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it becomes a target of forced stop.

  If the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y 661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y 664. When the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y 661; N), the number of times of symbol determination number output is updated by 1 (step Y 662), and the process proceeds to step Y 664.

  Next, save the display time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), load and prepare a command from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y666) ). Thereafter, the decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y668), and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 is performed (step Y669).

  Then, load the command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and save it in the hit symbol command area (step Y 670), and whether it is the special figure 2 small hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is the small hit Is determined (step Y671). When it is the special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), it moves to step Y674. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672) ), Information is loaded from the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

  Thereafter, information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y 674), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting processing 1 is performed (step Y 675). End processing while displaying.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 64 shows the process shift setting process 1 (step Y645) during the special figure 1 display in the special figure 1 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and the special figure 1 game process number area is processed number Save (step Y682).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 change control flag region (step Y684) Special process 1) during process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 65 shows the process shift setting process 1 (step Y 675) during the special figure 2 display in the special figure 2 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and the special figure 2 game process number area is processed number Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 2 change display game in the special view 2 display 52, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 2 display 52 is saved in the special view 2 change control flag region (step Y694) Special process 2) during process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2]
FIG. 66 shows the process shift setting process 2 (step Y 669) during the special figure 1 display in the special figure 2 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number "2" related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y 701), and the special figure 1 game process number area is processed number Is saved (step Y702).

  Next, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y704).

  The process up to this point is the same as in the special process 1 during process transition setting process 1 described above, and thereafter, information is set to be a result of outliers. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y706).

  Next, clear the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y 707), save the shift information in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y 708), save the shift information in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y 709) ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y710), the shift figure stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2 is ended. .

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 67 shows the process shift setting process 2 (step Y639) during the special figure 2 display in the special figure 1 fluctuation process described above. In this special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the special figure 2 game process number area is processed number Save (step Y722).

  Next, save the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, The stop flag relating to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y 724).

  The process up to this point is the same as the above-mentioned process of setting transition to processing 1 during special image 2 display, and thereafter, information is set to be a result of the removal. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y 725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area is cleared (step Y 726).

  Next, clear the special figure 2 big winning a prize opening open information territory (step Y727), save gap information in the small hitting flag 2 territory (step Y728), save gap information in the big hit flag 2 territory (step Y729) ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y730), the special figure 2 stop symbol area is saved and the stop symbol number is saved (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is ended. .

  By the processing of FIG. 62 to FIG. 67 described above, when one special figure fluctuation display game results in a special result, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forced to be stopped at the result of being removed. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game becoming a special result, a first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped at the out result, and the special figure 2 variable display game is a special result. As a result, the second end control process is performed in which the special view 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped on the basis of the out result.

  From the above, the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variation display game when the execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed. A first variable display game in which execution control is performed when a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) whose execution control is being performed by the control means (game control apparatus 100) becomes a special result Can be ended as a result other than the special result, and the second variation display game execution control unit is executed by the first variation display game execution control unit when execution control of the second variation display game is performed. If the first variable display game being controlled results in a special result, it is possible to end the second variable display game that is performing the execution control as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. In this way, when a special result is derived in one of the variable display games, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped by the result of the unbalance, and even when simultaneous fluctuation is performed, no problem occurs. Can be

[Process while displaying special figure 1]
In FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, the special figure 1 displaying process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above is shown. In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y751), the small hit flag Clear one area (step Y752).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y 753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y 754). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit information (step Y755), and if it is not a big hit (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. Also, if it is a big hit (step Y 755; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON), the feature continuous operating device operating, regarding the start of the special game 1 variable display game The medium signal is on, and the special symbol 1 signal is on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

  Then, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step Y757), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. Thereafter, the number-of-rounds upper limit table is set (step Y759), and the number-of-rounds upper limit corresponding to the number-of-rounds upper limit information (16, 8, 4, or 2 in the case of this embodiment) is acquired. Save to the area (step Y760). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the special drawing 1 stop design pattern is hit and prepared from the design command area (step Y762), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y765).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening information and the probability of becoming a big hit in the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y766, as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the state of probability, the big hit 2 signal and the big hit 3 signal are saved. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than 2R probability variation D1, and is turned ON when 2R probability variation D1 in high probability state, 2R probability variation in low probability state When it is D1, it is turned off. Also, the big hit 3 signal is turned ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than 2R probability variation D1, and is turned OFF when 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, 2R probability variation in the low probability state It is turned ON when it is D1.

  Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening information is set (step Y 767), and the set big hit fan fare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y 768) . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y769).

  If it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (step Y 769; Y), clear the top large winning opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y 770), flag over fraudulent monitoring period flag area in the top winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area Are saved (step Y771), and the process proceeds to step Y774. Also, if it is not a big hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y 769; N), that is, if it is a big hit to open the bottom big winning opening (second special variation winning device 39), the bottom big winning opening unfair winning number area Is cleared (step Y772), the flag for the fraud monitoring period outside is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y773), and the process proceeds to step Y774.

  Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774), and the special processing 1 game processing number area is saved (step Y775). Further, the fanfare / interval process shift setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y 755; N) at step Y 755, ie, if the big hit flag 1 is disengaging information, it is judged whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). To do (step Y777). Then, if the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y 777; Y), it is a high probability final fluctuation, that is, whether it is the last special figure fluctuation display game for which the lottery in the high probability state is performed It determines (step Y778).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y778; N), the process moves to step Y783. If the final change is a high probability (step Y 778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y 779), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y 780). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y 781), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y 782). By clearing the left-handed command notification flag, a left-handed command notification command is set in the special processing 1 special processing to be performed next time, and a notification to instruct a left-handed command is performed.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y783), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y784). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y 785), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y 786), and it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y 787).

  If it is not in the high probability (step Y 787; N), the signal relating to the left hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 788). Here, it is set to turn off the firing position designation signal 1. Then, the number in the left strike state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y 789). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing a left hit is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is in the high probability (step Y 787; Y), the signal regarding the right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 790). Here, it is set to turn on the launch position designation signal 1. Then, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right-handed state (step Y791). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right-handed is displayed.

  After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) (step Y792). If it is a small hit that opens the upper winning opening (step Y792; Y), The upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y 793), the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y 794), and the process proceeds to step Y 797. Also, if it is not a small hit to open the upper large winning opening (step Y 792; N), that is, if it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39), the lower large winning opening illegal prize A number area is cleared (step Y795), a fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y796), and the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 797) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is ended.

  If it is determined in step Y 777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y 777; N), it is a high probability final change, that is, the last special drawing for which the lottery in the high probability state was performed It is determined whether it is a variable display game (step Y798).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y798; N), the process moves to step Y806. If the final change is a high probability (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y800). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y801), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y802).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special game 2 is in the special hit state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variable display game, ie, during the small hit in the special figure 2 (step Y 803). When it is in the small hit of the special figure 2 (step Y803; Y), it transfers to step Y806. Thus, the state of instructing to hit the right is maintained. If the special figure 2 is not in the small hit (step Y 803; N), save the signal related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y 804), and left hitting in the gaming state display number 2 area. Save the number (step Y 805). Thereafter, clear the special figure 1 fluctuation of the special figure status area (information subtraction) (step Y 806), perform special process transition setting processing 1 for special figure 1 (step Y 807), and end the special figure 1 display processing. .

[Process during special figure 2 display]
FIG. 70 and FIG. 71 show the special figure 2 in-display process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the process of displaying the special view 2, the same process as the process of displaying the special view 1 described above is performed for the special view 2. In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), the small hit flag Clear the two areas (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y 815), and if it is not a big hit (step Y 815; N), it proceeds to step Y 837. Also, if it is a big hit (step Y 815; Y), the test signal (for example, to turn on the condition device operating signal, the feature continuous operation device operating the special equipment 2 variation display game big hit (special image 2 large hit) start The medium signal is turned on, and the special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

  Then, the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step Y 817), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y 818). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. Thereafter, the number-of-rounds upper limit table is set (step Y 819), and the number-of-rounds upper limit (16, 8, 4, or 2 in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the number-of-rounds upper limit information is acquired to set the number of rounds upper limit Save to the area (step Y820). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the special drawing 2 stop design pattern is hit and prepared from the design command area (step Y822), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y825).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the special winning opening information and the probability of becoming a big hit in the special view variable display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of the present embodiment, in step Y826, two jackpots and three jacks are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than 2R probability variation D1, and is turned ON when 2R probability variation D1 in high probability state, 2R probability variation in low probability state When it is D1, it is turned off. Also, the big hit 3 signal is turned ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than 2R probability variation D1, and is turned OFF when 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, 2R probability variation in the low probability state It is turned ON when it is D1.

  Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big winning opening opening information is set (step Y 827), and the set big hit fan fare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y 828) . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y829).

  If it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (step Y 829; Y), clear the top large winning opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y 830), flag over fraudulent monitoring period flag area in the top winning prize opening fraud monitoring period flag Are saved (step Y 831), and the process proceeds to step Y 834. Also, if it is not a big hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y 829; N), that is, if it is a big hit to open the bottom big winning opening (second special variation winning device 39), the bottom big winning opening fraud winning number area Is cleared (step Y 832), the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y 833), and the process proceeds to step Y 834.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834), and the special figure 2 game process number area is saved (step Y835). Further, the fanfare / interval process shift setting process (step Y 836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y 815; N) at step Y 815, that is, if the big hit flag 2 is out information, it is judged whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). Then, if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y 837; Y), it is a high probability final fluctuation, that is, whether it is the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery in the high probability state is performed It determines (step Y838).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y 838; N), the process proceeds to step Y 843. If the final change is a high probability (step Y 838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y 839), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step Y 840). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y841), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-handed command notification flag, a left-handed command notification command is set in the special processing 1 special processing to be performed next time, and a notification to instruct a left-handed command is performed.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y843), and effect command setting processing is performed (step Y844). Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), effect command setting processing is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y847).

  If it is not in the high probability (step Y 847; N), the signal relating to the left hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 848). Here, it is set to turn off the firing position designation signal 1. Then, the number in the left strike state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing a left hit is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is in the high probability (step Y847; Y), the signal regarding the right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, it is set to turn on the launch position designation signal 1. Then, the game state display number 2 area is saved with the number in the right-handed state (step Y 851). As a result, the first gaming state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right-handed is displayed.

  After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) (step Y852). If it is a small hit that opens the upper winning opening (step Y852; Y), The upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y853), the fraud monitoring out-of-time flag is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Also, if it is not a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y 852; N), that is, if it is a small hit that opens the lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39), the lower large winning opening illegal prize A number area is cleared (step Y 855), a fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region (step Y 856), and the process proceeds to step Y 857. Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 857) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is ended.

  If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is a high probability final change, that is, the last special drawing for which the lottery in the high probability state was performed It is determined whether it is a variable display game (step Y858). If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y 858; N), the process proceeds to step Y 866. If the final change is a high probability (step Y 858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y 859), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step Y 860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y861), and the left hitting instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y862).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a special hit of the special figure 1 is in progress, that is, a second special gaming state based on the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game (step Y863). If it is in the middle of the special figure 1 (step Y863; Y), it moves to step Y866. Thus, the state of instructing to hit the right is maintained. If the special figure 1 is not in the small hit (step Y863; N), save the signal related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step Y864), and in the game state display number 2 area Save the number (step Y865). After that, clear the special figure 2 fluctuation of the special figure status area (information subtraction) (step Y866), do special figure 2 usual processing transition setting processing 1 (step Y867), finish the special figure 2 display processing .

  That is, a first special game is generated in which the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variation winning device is opened with operation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variation display game. Second special game generation means for generating a second special game state for opening the special fluctuation winning device without activating the condition device based on the generation means and based on the second special result of the variable display game. I

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
In FIG. 72, the details of the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing (steps Y776 and Y836) in the processing of displaying the special drawing 1 and the processing of displaying the special drawing 2 described above will be described. In the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process, first, a signal regarding the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y 871). Here, the jackpot 1 signal to be output in the jackpot or jackpot is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (the state of reduced variation time of the special symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF.

  Thereafter, the number-of-rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y 873), and the number in the low probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y 874). The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (step Y876), and the special view fluctuation display executable in the high probability state The high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of games is cleared (step Y877). As a result, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Next, the information on the big hit is saved in the special view status area (step Y878), and the high probability final variation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Further, the signal regarding the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y 881).

  Thereafter, the cancellation flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step Y 882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area storing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared (step Y 883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation count area is cleared to 0 (step Y 884), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y 885), and the fanfare / interval processing shift setting process is ended. That is, with the occurrence of the big hit, all the information related to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is cleared.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process]
FIG. 73 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 797) in the special figure 1 display process described above. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, first, "7" concerning small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step Y891), and the process number is set as the special figure 1 game process number area. Save (step Y 892).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, the jackpot 1 signal to be output in the jackpot or jackpot is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

  Thereafter, the small hit medium information is saved in the special view status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special view small hit fanfare medium process transition setting processing is ended. Do.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 74 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process (step Y 857) in the special figure 2 display process described above. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process, first, "7" concerning small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step Y901), and the process number is set as the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y902).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, the jackpot 1 signal to be output in the jackpot or jackpot is set to ON. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y 905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

  Thereafter, the small hit medium information is saved in the special view status information (step Y 906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y 907), and the special view 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process is ended. Do.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
FIG. 75 shows fanfare / in-interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the special view 1 game processing and the special view 2 game processing described above. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y951), and a round command corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y952). (Step Y953).

  Next, a big hit middle processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y 954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit middle processing control pointer area (step Y 955). As the jackpot processing control pointer initial value, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. Here, the fifth R corresponds to the 16R positive variation F3 (special figure 2 large winning opening opening and closing pattern 5). In addition, in the case of performing one continuous opening in one round, 21 which is the big hit operation end value is set. Note that the initial value may be set to other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Then, the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The open time set here is, for example, one of 200 ms, 600 ms, 1600 ms and 29000 ms.

  Next, it is judged whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y 958), and if it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y 958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y 959) ), The special winning opening open time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y 960). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y 958; N), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y 961) and save the special winning opening open time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (Step Y962).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the upper large winning opening (first special variation winning device 38) (step Y963). It is possible to determine whether it is a big hit for the upper large winning opening opening from the set large opening opening information. If it is a big hit of the opening of the big prize winning opening (step Y963; Y), the process setting setting processing during big winning opening open is performed (step Y964), and the fanfare / interval in progress processing is ended. If the big winning opening opening is not a big hit (step Y963; N), the big winning opening opening processing transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y965), and the fanfare / interval middle processing ends.

[In process opening setting process 1 during the big winning opening open]
FIG. 76 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step Y 964) during the opening of the special winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process 1, first, a signal regarding the opening start of the upper large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric symbol 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper special winning opening on data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area in order to open the open / close door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 (step Y972), and the number of winnings for the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count number is cleared (step Y 973), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[In process opening setting process 2 during the big winning opening open]
FIG. 77 shows the processing setting for process transition during process opening setting 2 (step Y965) in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process 2, first, a signal regarding the opening start of the lower large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric symbol 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower special winning opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area in order to open the open / close door 39c of the second special variation winning device 39 (step Y982), and the number of winnings for the special winning opening is counted. The special winning opening count number is cleared (step Y 983), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing 2 is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 78 shows the special winning opening open process (steps Y112 and Y143) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In this big winning opening open processing, first, the big hit medium processing control pointer is loaded (step Y1001), and it is judged whether the loaded value is equal to or more than the big hit operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002).

  If the loaded value is not greater than the big hit operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; N), perform the big hit operation shift setting process (step Y1003) and update the big hit middle processing control pointer by 1 (step Y1004) , The special winning opening open processing ends. In this case, the opening and closing is performed in one round, and the opening and closing mode of the special variation winning device is set according to the updated big hit and middle processing control pointer.

  On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (here, 21) (step Y1002; Y), the current number of rounds and the number of rounds upper limit of the round number upper limit area in the special gaming state being executed are To determine whether the current round is the final round (step Y1005). Then, if it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and effect command setting processing (step Y1008) is performed. Also, if it is the final round (step Y1005; Y), prepare an ending command relating to the display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state (step Y1007), effect command setting processing (step Y1008) I do.

  Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 for the special winning opening remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1010). As the remaining sphere processing time, 600 ms, 800 ms or 1400 ms is set. And it is determined whether it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1011).

  If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012) and save the remaining ball processing time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012) Step Y1013). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1011; N), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1014) and save the remaining ball processing time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (Step Y1015).

  Thereafter, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the special winning opening open processing is ended. In step Y1016, the off data is set for both the upper large winning opening solenoid and the lower large winning opening solenoid, and the process for closing any large winning opening is performed.

[Big hit operation shift setting processing]
FIG. 79 shows the big hit operation shift setting process (step Y1004) in the above-mentioned process for opening the big winning opening. In this big hit operation shift setting processing, first, branch processing is performed depending on whether the value of the big hit / middle processing control pointer is even or odd (step Y1021). Here, branch processing is performed assuming that 0 is an even number.

  If it is determined in step Y1021 that the value of the big hit middle process control pointer is even, the wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 1500 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process moves to step Y1026. In step Y1023, off data is set for both the upper large winning opening solenoid and the lower large winning opening solenoid, and processing for closing any large winning opening is performed.

  On the other hand, when the value of the big hit middle processing control pointer is odd in step Y1021, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, 200 ms is set if the value of the big hit middle processing control pointer is 1 to 19 as the big winning opening opening time, and 25000 ms is set if it is 21. Next, the upper winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process shifts to step Y1026. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, only the upper large winning opening (the first special variation winning device 38) is repeatedly opened and closed during one round, so the step Y 1024 saves on data for the upper large winning opening solenoid. doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, the opening and closing of the lower large winning opening (the second special variation winning device 39) may be repeated in one round.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026), and if it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1027), the big hit operation shift setting processing ends. If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1028), and the big hit operation shift setting process is ended. The above processing makes it possible to repeat the opening and closing of the special winning opening in one round.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
FIG. 80 shows the special winning hole remaining ball processing (steps Y113 and Y144) in the special drawing 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing described above. In this special winning opening residual ball processing, first, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round (Step Y1041).

  Then, if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), the signal regarding the end of the special winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and 3 for fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

  The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the remaining ball processing time, and from the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the interval time. For example, in the special figure 1 large winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400ms and the interval time of 600ms are set, the interval period becomes 2000ms, and in this interval period, interval effect is displayed on the display device 41 etc. Is executed.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), the big hit end processing shift setting processing is performed (step Y1045), and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1046), 6 is set as the processing number according to the special figure 1 big hit end process or the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y 1047).

  And it is determined whether it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), save the set time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y 1050), finish the special winning opening remaining ball processing. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area ( Step Y1052), finish the special winning opening remaining ball processing.

  The ending period from the end of the last round to the end of the special game state is a period from the end of the last round to the passage of the remaining ball processing time, and the period from the passage of the remaining ball processing time to the ending time. For example, since the remaining ball processing time of 1,400 ms and the ending time of 9,600 ms are set in the special figure 1 large winning opening / closing pattern 1, the ending period is 11,000 ms, and in this ending period, the ending effect is produced by the display device 41 etc. Is executed.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 81 shows the big hit end processing shift setting process (step Y1045) in the above-mentioned big winning opening residual ball process. In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, a signal related to the open end of the big winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

  Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step Y1072), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step Y1073) ), Clears the information of the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step Y1074).

  Then, clear the information of the round number upper limit value information area storing the flag for upper limit value determination of the round number (step Y1075), and of the special winning opening open information area storing the flag for opening information determination of the special winning opening The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information on the big hit middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end processing shift setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 82 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 big hit end process, first, “0” is set as a process number related to the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

  Next, a signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (the state of reduced variation time of the special symbol) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1104). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is to be continued.

  Thereafter, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1105). Here, the condition device operating signal, the character continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1106). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal are set to ON.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the high probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1108). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time saving state is always performed during the high probability, these are not distinguished here but are the numbers in the high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1109), and the number of off is stored in the round LED pointer area (step Y1110).

  Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1111), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1112), The special drawing status area is cleared (step Y1113). It should be noted that, by clearing the special view status area, the special view status 0 indicates that neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed.

  Thereafter, the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1114), and the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed in the high probability state is an initial value (here, 50). ) Is saved (step Y1115). Furthermore, save the probability information command (high probability) in the power failure recovery send command area (step Y1116), save the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), special figure 1 big hit end processing ends.

  The special view variation display game can be started for any of the special view 1 and the special view 2 by performing the special view 1 big hit end process, but in the timer interrupt process, the special view 2 game is performed after the special view 1 game process. In order to perform processing, processing to start the special view variation display game is performed in the special view 2 game processing with the timer interrupt which has performed special view 1 big hit end processing, and the special view 2 variation display game is performed than the special view 1 variation display game Will be able to start earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117, the start process for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, The variable display game and the special view 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

  In other words, the second variable display game execution control unit continues the process until the first variable display game execution control unit can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. (2) A game processing standby means is provided to prevent the processing relating to the start of the variable display game from being made executable.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 83 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process. This special figure 2 big hit end processing is the same processing except that step Y1117 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit processing is not done.

  First, "0" is set as a process number relating to the special figure 2 routine process (step Y1121), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1122). Next, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1123). Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (the state of reduced variation time of the special symbol) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1124). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is to be continued.

  Thereafter, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1125). Here, the condition device operating signal, the character continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state are saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal are set to ON.

  Then, the signal related to the right-handed command is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1127). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, the number in the high probability is saved in the gaming state display number area (step Y1128). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the time saving state is always performed during the high probability, these are not distinguished here but are the numbers in the high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1129), and the number of extinguished is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130).

  Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1132), The special drawing status area is cleared (step Y1133). It should be noted that, by clearing the special view status area, the special view status 0 indicates that neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed.

  Thereafter, the high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1134), and the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of times of execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state is an initial value (here, 50). ) Is saved (step Y1135). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y1136), and the special figure 2 big hit end processing is ended.

  By these special view 1 big hit processing and special figure 2 big hit processing, a specific gaming state that is a high probability state will be set until 50 special figure fluctuation display games are executed after the end of the first special gaming state . That is, the specific gaming state generation means capable of generating a specific gaming state in which the game control apparatus 100 has a probability of the result of the variable display game becoming a special result for a predetermined period after the end of the special gaming state. I Further, the specific gaming state generation means is configured to increase the probability that the result of the variable display game will be the first special result over the predetermined state as the specific gaming state, as compared to the normal state.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle process (steps Y115 and Y146) in the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in the small hit fanfare medium process, first, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1201).

  If the opening pattern is small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower large winning opening opening and closing pattern 1) at step Y1201, prepare a small hitting open command of lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) opening, (Step Y1202), rendering command setting processing is performed (Step Y1203). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1204), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1205).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 1 (here, 48 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric symbol 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the process shifts to step Y1230.

  In addition, when the opening pattern is small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower large winning opening opening and closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, the small hitting open command of the lower large winning opening (second special variation winning device 39) opening It prepares (step Y1209) and performs rendering command setting processing (step Y1210). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit process is set as the process number (step Y1211), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1212).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric symbol 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process shifts to step Y1230.

  In addition, when the opening pattern is small hit 3 (special figure 2 upper large winning a prize opening and closing pattern 6) in step Y1201, small hitting open command of upper large winning a prize opening (1st special fluctuation winning a prize device 38) opening Preparation is performed (step Y1216), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step Y1217). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit processing is set as the processing number (step Y1218), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1219).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 3 (here, 1200 ms) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric symbol 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process shifts to step Y1230.

  In addition, when the opening pattern is small hit 4 (special figure 2 upper winning a prize opening opening and closing pattern 7) in step Y1201, the small hitting open command of the opening of the upper large winning a prize opening (first special variation winning device 38) It prepares (step Y1223), and performs rendering command setting processing (step Y1224). Next, the small hit 8 during the small hit process is set as the process number (step Y1225), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1226).

  Thereafter, the small hit open time 4 (1600 ms here) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric symbol 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper winning prize opening on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process shifts to step Y1230. After processing according to these small hit types, the large winning opening count number area for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1230), and the small hit fanfare middle processing is ended.

[Small hit during processing]
FIG. 85 shows the small hit middle processing (steps Y116 and Y147) in the special view 1 game processing and the special view 2 game processing described above. In the small hit middle process, first, a small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and a rendering command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1243).

  If the opening pattern is small hit 1 (special figure 1 lower large winning opening opening and closing pattern 1) in step Y1243, set 9 for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y1244), and special figure 1 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit residual ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247), End processing during hit.

  If the open pattern is small hit 2 (special figure 2 lower large winning opening opening and closing pattern 2) in step Y1243, set 9 for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y 1248), and special figure 2 The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (step Y1249). The small hit residual ball processing time 2 (here 600 ms) is saved in the special view 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251), End processing during hit.

  If the opening pattern is small hit 3 or 4 (special figure 2 large winning opening opening and closing pattern 6 or 7) in step Y1243, set 9 for the small hit remaining ball processing as the processing number (step Y1252) The special processing number 2 game processing number area saves the processing number (step Y1253). Then, small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255), small End processing during hit.

  In steps Y1247, Y1251 and Y1255, the off data is set for both the upper large winning opening solenoid and the lower large winning opening solenoid, and processing for closing any large winning opening is performed.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
FIG. 86 shows small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117 and Y148) in the special drawing 1 game processing and the special drawing 2 game processing described above. In this small hit residual ball processing, first, it is judged whether it is a small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271). If it is a small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), set 10 for the special figure 1 small hit end process as the process number (step Y1272), and set the process number to the special figure 1 game process number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here 100 ms) is saved in the special view 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process goes to step Y1278.

  If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y1271; N), set 10 for the special figure 2 small hit process as the process number (step Y1275), and set the process number to the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (100 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process goes to step Y1278.

  Then, a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Further, the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step Y 1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 87 shows the special figure 1 small hitting end process (step Y118) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 for the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special drawing status area is cleared (step Y1306). By clearing the special view status area, special view status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed is obtained.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability is in progress (step Y1307), and if it is in the high probability (step Y1307; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1310. If not high probability (step Y1307; N), the signal regarding the left-handed indication is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, save the number in the left hitting state in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), save the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310) ), Special figure 1 small hit end processing ends. Here too, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process, and the special figure 1 variable display game The special figure 2 variation display game is processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 88 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 is set for the special figure 2 normal process as a process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

  Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). Thereafter, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special view status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special view status area, special view status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is being executed is obtained.

  Next, it is judged whether or not high probability is in progress (step Y1338), and in the case of high probability being in progress (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hitting end processing is ended. If not high probability (step Y1338; N), the signal regarding the left-handed indication is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hitting end processing is ended.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 89 shows symbol variation control processing (steps Y120 and Y153) in the special view 1 game processing and the special view 2 game processing described above. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is varying (step Y1401).

  And, when the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), the symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the symbol of the control object is acquired (step Y1403), the blinking control timer concerning the symbol of the control object Is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, the time is up (step Y1405).

  If the value of the blink control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. If the value of the blink control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the blink control timer initial value (100 ms here) is saved in the blink control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), and the symbol to be controlled is displayed. The variation symbol number according to is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area of interest is acquired (step Y1408). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the change control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is ended. As a result, a special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special view display to be controlled among the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing process]
FIG. 90 shows the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this segment LED editing process, a round display displaying the number of rounds at the big hit (the number of opening and closing of the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39) provided in the collective display device 50. Part 60, the first gaming state display part 77 to inform the player of the hitting which is advantageous among the left hitting (normal hitting) and the right hitting, the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game The setting regarding the drive of the segment LED which comprises the probability display part 78 to alert | report etc. is performed.

  In this segment LED editing process, first, the special figure 1 pending number table in which the display mode in the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), and the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number is acquired Save to the area (step X602). Next, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit 60 is defined is set (step X603), display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step X604).

  Then, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode in the probability display unit 78 is defined is set (step X605), display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606). Thereafter, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode in the first game state display unit 77 is defined is set (step X607), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area ( Step X608), end the segment LED editing process.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 91 shows the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start or the end of fraud notification is set.

  In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), that is, abnormal magnetism It is determined whether it is in the state of detecting (step X611). If the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 and the timer is timed up. It determines (step X613).

  If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step X613; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( Here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a command of magnet informing notification is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region. (Step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618). If the magnet fraud alerting timer that defines f is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet fraud alert timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is 0 (step X620). If the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step X613; N), the processing also proceeds to step X619.

  Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. In addition, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, the fraud alert period is over or the fraud alert is from the beginning. If it is not performed, a command for magnet informing end is prepared (step X621). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623).

  Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), rendering command setting processing is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is ended. Do.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 92 shows the board radio wave improper monitoring process (step X114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

  In this board radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the board radio wave sensor 62 is output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and from the state of the detection signal taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). If the board radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud alert timer initial value (60000 ms in this case) is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step X632).

  Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step X633), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X634), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave cheating, unlike in the case of magnetic cheating, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is not 0 and -1 is updated ( Step X 635). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is 0 (step X636).

  If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is 0 (step X 636; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing is over, or the injustice is notified from the beginning. If not done, prepare a command of the end of board radio wave fraud notification (step X637), prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is a board radio wave It is determined whether the value of the incorrect flag area matches the value (step X639).

  Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), effect command setting processing is performed (step X641), and board radio wave fraud monitoring End the process.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 93 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the external information editing process, the monitoring result in payout command transmission process (step X105), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114), etc. On the basis of the above, the information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game arcade internal control device or a test shot test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701), and when the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main frame (front frame 12) ) It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). If the main frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the off data of the security signal is external information The file is saved in the output data area (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

  On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step X 701; Y) or when the body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X 702; Y), the door / frame opening signal is The on data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, the information in which the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as the external information.

  Next, the security signal control timer, which counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch, etc. ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  Then, if the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710). Transition. As a result, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. In addition, if the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X 708; Y), is it during occurrence of frame radio wave irregularity that is detection of abnormal radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12? Is determined (step X709).

  If frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of the switch is occurring (step X711). When the switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

  Then, during a magnet fraud (step X713; Y), during a board radio wave fraud (step X714; Y), during a special winning opening fraud (step X715; Y), during special feature 2 abnormal fluctuation (step X716; Y) If the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X 718) and the gaming machine error status signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (step X719), Go to step X720. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. If none of the errors in steps X713 to X716 has occurred, the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

  The starting opening 1 signal editing process (step X720) for editing the winning signal to the first starting winning opening 36 and the starting opening 2 signal editing process (step X721) for editing the winning signal to the second starting winning opening 37 Do. Next, main prize ball signal editing processing (step X 722) is performed to set information on the scheduled number of prize balls to be paid out, and symbol determination number signal editing processing is performed to set information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game. Then (step X723), the external information editing process is ended.

[Starting opening 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 94 shows the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. In this starting opening 1 signal editing process, first, if the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the starting opening 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of starting opening 1 signal output is 0 (step X733).

  Then, if the start opening 1 signal output number is not 0 (step X733; N), the start opening 1 signal output number is updated by -1 (step X734), and the start opening 1 signal output is made in the start opening 1 signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X735). The start opening 1 signal output control timer initial value is the time obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the start port signal and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) (For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the starting opening 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the starting opening 1 signal editing process is ended. If the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM (step X738) ), The start opening 1 signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start opening 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the start 1 port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736). The fact that the start opening 1 signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the start opening 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. If the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X736; N), save the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step X738), the start opening 1 signal editing process is ended. The starting opening 2 signal editing process (step X721) in the above-mentioned external information editing process performs the same processing as the starting opening 1 signal editing process for the starting opening 2 signal.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 95 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning to the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (here 10) to the external device It is a process.

  In this main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 (step X743).

  When the main prize ball signal output number is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by 1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X745). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is obtained by adding the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the main prize ball signal and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step X743; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X 748), The main prize ball signal editing process is finished.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X746). Note that the main prize ball signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X746; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is finished.

[Pattern fixed number signal editing process]
FIG. 96 shows the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step X723) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process for controlling an output time of information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game.

  In this symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). If the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is 0 (step X 752; Y), it is determined whether the number of symbol determination frequency signal outputs, which is incremented by +1 every time the special view variation display game is 0, is 0 (Step X753).

  Then, when the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is not 0 (step X753; N), the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal output is in the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X755). This symbol determination frequency signal output control timer initial value added the time of the on state (for example, high level) of the symbol determination frequency signal (here, 256 ms) and the time of off state (for example, low level) (here, 300 ms) It is time (in this case 556 ms). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game can be executed simultaneously, so the on state time is 256 ms and the off state time is 300 ms.

  Thereafter, the on data for turning on the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol determination frequency signal editing process is ended. When the symbol determination frequency signal output frequency is 0 (step X753; Y), the off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X758) The symbol determination number signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756). The symbol determination frequency signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms) or more. If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. If the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X756; N), the off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step X748), the symbol determination number signal editing process is ended.

  Next, the effects of the game will be described. FIG. 97 shows a display example on the display device 41. The display control is performed by the effect control device 300 based on the control information received from the game control device 100.

  FIG. 97 (a) shows a display example on the display device 41 during the game in the normal gaming state. A game mode display unit 80 for displaying a game state is provided in the upper right portion of the display area. Here, "Normal Stage" is displayed, which means that the game is in the normal gaming state. In the center of the display area, a decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game display unit 81 for displaying a decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game is provided. Here, the decorative special-purpose 1 variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in the variation display areas on the left, middle, and right and then displaying the identification information in a stopped state.

  At the lower right portion of the display area, a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game is provided. Here, ○ and-are used as identification information, and they are displayed alternately in the variable display, and thereafter ○ is displayed for a special result, and-in the case of disassembly, and a special figure 2 fluctuation display is displayed. Display the game

  At the lower center of the display area, a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration start storage display corresponding to the first start storage is provided. The decoration start memory display displayed here corresponds to the first start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the order of the memory, and indicates that there are four first start memories here. The decoration start memory display on the left end is the decoration start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and is shifted to the left each time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to each start memory and the prefetching result such as the fluctuation pattern by the display mode.

  An under-execution storage display unit 84 is provided at the lower center of the display area and to the left of the storage display unit 83, for displaying information related to starting storage corresponding to the special view 1 variable display game currently being executed. The decoration start memory display at the left end of the memory display unit 83 is transferred to the in-execution memory display unit 84 at the start of the special image 1 variable display game, and the result of the special image 1 fluctuation display game executed and the fluctuation pattern, etc. Is suggested by the display mode.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows a display example on the display device 41 during the game in the specific gaming state. At the upper left portion of the display area, a game number information display unit 85 is provided which indicates information on the number of games in the specific gaming state. "LAST" indicates the number of remaining games that can be executed in the specific gaming state, and "TOTAL" indicates the number of games executed in a series of specific gaming states.

  Although the numerical value displayed on the number-of-games information display unit 85 may not necessarily match the actual number of games, the effect control device 300 manages the actual number of games, and The display contents in the number-of-games information display unit 85 are set on the basis of this. The effect control device 300 manages information on the number of remaining games by subtracting the number of remaining games in the specific gaming state every time the special feature variation display game is executed, and the information displayed on the number-of-games information display unit 85 corresponds to this information. Is set to the original.

  On the right side of the number-of-games information display unit 85, a game mode display unit 80 for displaying the gaming state is provided. Here, the display of "squeal rush" which means that it is a normal gaming state is made. On the right side of the game mode display section 80, a right strike instruction display 86 is provided to notify that the right strike is advantageous to the player. On the right side of the right-handed instruction display 86, a memory display unit 83 and a decorative special view 1 variable display game display unit 81 are provided. Here, the first start memory number is displayed by numbers. Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 and the storage display unit 83 may not be displayed in a state in which the special figure 1 variable display game is not executed.

  Below the decorative special view 1 variation display game display unit 81, an acquired number display unit 87 indicating the number of winning balls acquired in a series of specific gaming states is provided. The winning number display portion 87 displays one winning ball as 1 pt, which indicates that 1234 winning balls are obtained here. In the center of the display area, the number of winning balls is displayed based on the winning on the special variation winning device, and is added to the number-of-earnings display portion 87.

  In this acquired number display section 87, from the start of the special gaming state triggered the start of the specific gaming state to the end of a series of specific gaming states, that is, a special gaming state based on the first special result generated in the low probability state The number of winning balls acquired in the period from the start to the low probability state is displayed by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times without the first special result being derived during the specific gaming state In this period, it is added as needed each time the ball is won. In addition, the number of winning balls obtained in the special gaming state based on the first special result and the number of winning balls obtained in the special gaming state based on the second special result may be separately displayed, or only one is displayed. You may do so. Alternatively, only the number of winning balls based on the winnings on the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 39 may be displayed, or the first starting winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37, The number of winning balls based on the winning on the general winning opening 35 may be displayed together.

  At the lower right portion of the display area, a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game is provided. The display position of the decorative special figure 2 variation display game display unit 82 is the same as that in the normal gaming state. In the lower part of the center of the display area, a presentation symbol display unit 88 for displaying a presentation symbol corresponding to the special view variation display game is provided. The effect pattern corresponding to the special view change display game is performed by variably displaying the effect design in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas, and then displaying the stop design. In addition, the change of the symbol for effect and the stop do not necessarily correspond to the change and the stop of the special view change display game. This effect design is executed simultaneously with respect to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which can be executed simultaneously and one is a special result and the other is forced to be stopped due to the result of being out To make it easy for people to understand.

  In other words, the effect control device 300 is a receiving means capable of receiving control information from the transmitting means (game control device 100), and based on the control information received by the receiving means, the decorative variation display game (1) An ornament variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the variation variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game) is provided. In addition, in the specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 executes the decoration variation display game corresponding to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) or the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) Each time the variable display game is executed the number of times is subtracted from the predetermined number of times. Further, in the specific gaming state, the effect control device 300 causes the plurality of effect identification information to be variably displayed and stopped without corresponding to the execution of the ornament variation display game, which corresponds to the subtraction number of the subtraction means. The effect identification information variation display means can be implemented. Further, the effect control device 300 constitutes a game number information notifying means capable of notifying the game number information which is information according to the subtraction result by the subtraction means.

  FIG. 98 shows the execution of the special view variation display game and the decoration special view variation display game, and changes in the display of the effect symbols and the game number information display unit 85. FIG. 99 shows the display on the display device 41. The In the ending period (t31) of the first special gaming state shown in FIG. 98, a notification that the specific gaming state is started is performed as shown in FIG. 99 (a), and the game number information display unit 85 displays the specific gaming Display the remaining number of playable games (50 times) in the state.

  Here, there are three first start memories at the end of the first special game state, and as shown in FIG. 98, the special figure 1 variation display game is started with the end of the first special game state, and the decorative special figure is displayed. The variable display game is also started (t32). Furthermore, with the end of the first special game state, the game ball is winning in the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variation display game is started, and the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is also started (t32) . That is, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed at the same time. In addition, although it is shown as being started at the same time here, since the processing of the special view 1 variation display game is actually performed first after the end of the special gaming state, the special view 1 variation display game is actually performed. The special figure 2 variable display game is started after the is started.

  In this special view 2 variation display game, the result becomes a small hit as it ends (t35) before the scheduled end timing (t37) of the variation time of the special view 1 variation display game. For this reason, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is forced to be stopped as a result of the cancellation upon completion of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (t35).

  Here, if the progress of the game is displayed only with the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game and the game number information display section 85, the conventional gaming machine does not execute the special figure fluctuation display game simultaneously There is a possibility that it becomes difficult for a player who is used to to grasp the progress of the game. Therefore, using the effect pattern to display the progress of the game by a display such as a conventional gaming machine that does not simultaneously execute the special view variation display game, changing the number-of-games information display unit 85 in accordance with the progress of the effect pattern Makes it easy to grasp the progress of the game.

  First, with the start of the special view 1 change display game, the effect display of the effect design is started by the effect display portion 88. Along with this, the number-of-games information display section 85 sets the number of remaining games (LAST) to 49 and the number of executed games (TOTAL) to 1 (t32). In this example, the first special result is derived in the normal gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed, and the specific gaming state is started after the end of the first special gaming state. The number of games played is one. When the special gaming state occurs in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is continuous, so that the value is obtained by adding 1 to the number of executed games before the start of the special gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b), even if the special view 2 variation display game is started thereafter, the variation display of the effect design symbol is maintained as it is, and the display content of the game number information display unit 85 does not change either. In the figure, ○ and-are simultaneously displayed to show variable display, but in actuality, ○ and-are alternately displayed to perform variable display. Since the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly stopped by this special figure 2 variation display game, the setting change of the display contents of the effect design is performed based on the start of the special figure 2 variation display game It becomes.

  As shown in FIG. 98, due to this change, the effect design currently being displayed in a variation is stopped before the end of the variation time of the special view 2 variation display game (t33). As shown in FIG. 99 (c), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating that the symbol is dislocated. At this time, it is only the effect design symbol, and the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game remain fluctuatingly displayed.

  In addition, the stop symbol of the symbol for the effect at this time suggests or notifies that a special result is derived by the next stop as “NEXT” or “attention” other than the stop symbol indicating that it is a loss. Also good. In addition, as a variation pattern of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game, the re-variation display in which the fluctuation display is started again after being temporarily stopped in a result aspect other than the special result aspect in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game When it is possible to execute the so-called pseudo continuous change display mode performed once or more, the effect at the time of stopping or reopening of the effect design may be the same effect as the temporary stop or the re-change display in the pseudo continuous change display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 98, the variable display of the rendition for the effect is started (t34). At this time, the display on the number-of-games information display section 85 is updated, the number of remaining games (LAST) becomes 48, and the number of executed games (TOTAL) becomes 2 (FIG. 99 (d)). Then, when the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are stopped, the change display of the effect pattern is stopped (t35). As shown in FIG. 99 (e), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating that it is a small hit. In addition, the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game also stop the fluctuation display and display the result mode.

  By changing the setting of the display mode of the effect pattern in this manner, the progress of the special view variable display game is displayed in the same display mode as a conventional gaming machine in which the special view variable display game is not executed simultaneously. That is, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game (t32), the special purpose variation variation display is continuously performed until the special figure 1 variation display game is scheduled to stop (t37), and it is stopped and one special figure variation display Although it was planned to indicate that the game was played, the setting of the display content of the effect symbol is changed based on the start (t32) of the special figure 2 variable display game thereafter. In this change, the special figure 2 variation display game is once stopped (t33), and the variation is started again (t34), and the special figure 2 variation display game is changed to be stopped (t35). There is. That is, the symbol for effect is made to stop according to the subtraction number (here 2) in the subtraction means from the start to the stop of the special figure fluctuation display game which triggered the start of fluctuation of the symbol for effect ing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98, the second special game state is started and the first special change winning device 38 is opened. As shown in 99 (f), in the special game state, the number of winning balls is displayed along with the winning on the special variation winning device, and is added to the number-of-earnings display portion 87. Thereafter, when the second special game state ends, the special figure variation display game can be executed (t38). The game proceeds from t38 to t39 and from t39 to t40 as in the above-described t32 to t38.

  In addition, when only the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed without the first starting memory, the fluctuation of the design symbol for production and the stop become simultaneous with the fluctuation and the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (t40 to t41) . In addition, when only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed, the fluctuation of the design symbol for the effect and the stop are simultaneous with the fluctuation and the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  In the case where the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are simultaneously executed, and the special figure 1 variation display game ends earlier, the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is If it is a disconnection, the special purpose symbol is stopped with the stop of the special view 1 variation display game, and the variation display is performed again. In addition, when the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the special result, because the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is forced to be stopped by the disappointing result, the stop of the production design by the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game The variable display is performed again, and it is made to stop with the stop of the special view 1 variable display game.

  From the above, in the special game state, the effect control means (effect control device 300) executes the decoration variation display game (the decoration special view variation display game) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game. Subtracting means (effect control device 300) for subtracting the number of times of execution of the variable display game from the predetermined number of times each time and the specific gaming state, and does not correspond to the execution of the decoration variable display game And (d) production effect identification information variation display means (effect control device 300) capable of performing variation display of the symbol for) and stop display according to the subtraction number of the subtraction means; The means is a decoration change corresponding to the first end control process in the first variable display game being executed based on the second variable display game becoming a special result in the specific gaming state. When the display game ends, the variable display and the stop display of the numbers corresponding to the first variable display game and the second variable display game are performed by the end, and subtraction by the subtraction means is performed for each of the variable display games. It is possible to notify the player of the event.

  In the effect identification information variation display means, the decoration variation display game is performed in response to the execution of the first end control process in the first variation display game based on the second variation display game becoming a special result. When the game ends, the variable display and stop display corresponding to the first variable display game are performed before the end, and then the variable display corresponding to the second variable display game is performed, and the second variable display is performed at the time of the end. It means that the stop display corresponding to the game is performed.

  Next, control of the special view 1 variation display game in the normal gaming state will be described. As shown in FIG. 100, in a state in which the special view 1 variation display game and the special view 2 variation display game are simultaneously executed, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the effect with high expectation for the special view 1 variation display game. As shown in FIG. 100 (c), when the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped by the special result first, the effect in the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted and forced by the omission result. Will be stopped. In order to avoid such a state, in the effect control device 300, when receiving a command notifying that the special view 1 variation display game is longer from the game control device 100, the effect with a high degree of expectation is I do not try to do it.

[Effect lottery process]
FIG. 101 shows the effect drawing process performed by the effect control device 300 as a process for determining the fluctuation pattern of the decorative figure 1 fluctuation display game at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. In this effect lottery process, first, the fluctuation pattern received from the game control apparatus 100 is checked (step Z11), and it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern which can execute the premiere effect which is a high expectation effect (step Z12) . If it is not a fluctuation pattern in which the premiere effect can be executed (step Z12; N), an effect lottery process is performed (step Z15), and the effect lottery process is ended. In the effect lottery process, a fluctuation pattern other than the premier effect is selected in accordance with the fluctuation pattern received from the game control device 100.

  Further, if it is a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the premiere effect (step Z12; Y), it is determined whether a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer is received (step Z13). If a command notifying that the variation time of the special view 1 is longer is received (step Z13; Y), a specific pattern is set (step Z16), and the effect lottery process is ended. In this case, since there is a possibility that the situation as shown in FIG. The specific pattern will be described later.

  Further, when the command notifying that the variation time of the special view 1 is longer is not received (step Z13; N), the premier effect lottery process is performed (step Z14), and the normal effect lottery process (step Z15) To complete the effect lottery process. In the premiere effect lottery process, the presence or absence and type of execution of the premiere effect (special effect) are selected. If it is determined that the premiere effect is to be performed, the type is determined, and the determined premiere effect becomes the fluctuation pattern of the decorative special-character 1 fluctuation display game. In this case, the lottery in the normal effect lottery process is not performed. In addition, when it is decided not to execute the premiere effect, a fluctuation pattern other than the premiere effect is selected in the normal effect lottery process. In the premiere effect lottery process, whether or not to perform the lottery for the premiere effect or the probability of winning the premiere effect when the lottery is performed may be made different depending on whether or not the special result is obtained.

  FIG. 102 shows an example in which the special pattern is not set because the special view 1 change display game is ended before the special view 2 change display game. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), when the special view 2 variation display game is being executed in the normal gaming state, the special view 1 variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 102 (b). In this case, the premiere effect can be set, and in this example, the premiere effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 102 (c) and (d).

  Here, since the special figure 1 variation display game is a special result (here, a big hit), as shown in FIG. 102 (e), the special figure 2 variation display game is released with the end of the special figure 1 variation display game. It is forcibly stopped by the result. When the special figure 1 variation display game is to be released, the special figure 2 variation display game is not forcibly stopped.

  FIG. 103 shows an example in which a specific pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the special view 2 variation display game is being executed in the normal gaming state, the special view 1 variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 103 (b). The special figure 2 fluctuation display game being executed is finished earlier than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and has a special result (here, a small hit). Therefore, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is forced to be stopped at the result of the unfair, so the specific pattern is set.

  This specific pattern is a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) of a predetermined time which does not generate the reach state. If the special figure 2 variation display game is not finished even after this variation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is displayed in a temporary stop state where it is displayed so as to swing with a result. Become. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation indication game ends before this fluctuation time elapses, the identification design of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation indication game is stopped at that point in time.

  When the special figure 1 variation display game is ended with the end of the special figure 2 variation display game, as shown in FIG. 103 (d), the identification symbol of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game is stopped. Thereafter, the second special gaming state is entered, and after the end of the second special gaming state, the special view 1 variation display game is started based on the first start storage as shown in FIG. 103 (e).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the period during which the identification symbol is variably displayed at high speed in the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set as the time from the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to a predetermined time before The state of FIG. 103 (c) may be passed.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are simultaneously executed, the special pattern is set even when the special figure 1 variation display game is ended first and the first special result is obtained. You may FIG. 104 shows a display example in this case. FIGS. 104 (a) to (c) are the same as FIG. Thereafter, with the end of the special figure 1 variation display game, as shown in FIG. 104 (d), the decorative special figure 1 variation display game is stopped in the result mode of the first special result and the special figure 2 variation display game is ended. , Becomes the first special gaming state. By making such an effect possible, expectation can be given to a specific pattern.

  In the case where it is possible to select the outlier result as the result of the special view 2 changeable display game, the specific pattern as shown in FIG. 104 is set even when the special view 2 changeable display game is stopped earlier with the outset result. It is possible. In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes an out result, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is stopped first, the premiere lottery process (step Z14) may be executable.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned effect drawing process for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed, the premier effect lottery The process (step Z14) may not be performed. In this case, when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a special result in the normal gaming state than the longest variation time set when the special figure 1 variation display game becomes a first special result in the normal gaming state It is preferable to set the shortest variation time to be longer. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variation display game is started after the start of the special figure 1 variation display game for which the premiere effect is set, the special figure 1 variation display game is stopped earlier, so there is a problem It does not occur.

  In addition, based on the fact that the special result is derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, the other special figure fluctuation display game may be considered as measures other than the above as measures for the case where the special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped in the out-of-focus result. For example, as described in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 44, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed from now is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N In addition, in place of or in place of this process (step Y255), a process may be performed to reset the fluctuation pattern. .

  In the process of resetting the variation pattern, if the effect control device 300 changes the premiere effect to a non-selectable variation pattern, it is not possible to execute the premiere effect in the process of FIG. 101 (step Z12; N). It is judged that the selection of the premiere effect is not made. Further, in the process of resetting the variation pattern, the variation pattern may be changed to select a specific pattern so that the particular pattern is always selected. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time may not be changed or may be changed.

  Also, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern determined once in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed from now on when the fluctuation pattern is determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) A process of determining whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y254), and the fluctuation pattern according to the game situation is determined from the beginning You may do so.

  In addition, when it is possible to select the outlier result as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now only when the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a special result A process (step Y254) of determining whether it is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is performed. When the result of the special view 2 variable display game is out, this processing is not necessary because the special view 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped by the result of the release.

  In addition, as another example of dealing with the case where the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the outlier result based on the special result being derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, for example, special figure 1 In the normal gaming state in which the variable display game is mainly performed, the special view 1 variable display game may be treated as an advantage, and the processing may be advanced so that the special view 1 variable display game proceeds advantageously.

  When such processing is performed, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. In step Y254; N), instead of the processing in steps Y225 and Y226, it is determined whether the result of the special view 1 variation display game is a special result, and in the case of a special result, variation of the special view 1 variation display game A process is performed to change the time to be less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special view 2 fluctuation display game. In this way, it is possible to prevent the special result that should have been derived in the special view 1 variable display game from being changed to an out result.

  In addition, even if the result of the special view 1 variation display game is a loss and it is less than the remaining variation time of the special view 2 variation display game, if the first starting memory number is large, the special condition based on these is The short variation time may be set so that the variation display game in FIG. 1 can be settled before the end of the special view 2 variation display game.

  The special figure 2 variable display game is not particularly disadvantageous even if the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, but the special figure 2 variable display in the special game state mainly composed of the special figure 2 variable display game The game may be treated as superior. For example, in the special figure 2 variation start process shown in FIG. 45, when the variation time is not less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game for the special figure 2 variation display game determined in the high probability state, It is determined whether the 1 variable display game has a special result and the special figure 2 variable display game has a first special result, and the special figure 2 variable display game has a first special result. A process may be performed to change the variation time of the display game so as to be less than the remaining variation time of the special view 1 variation display game.

  By doing this, it is possible to prevent the first special result that should have been derived in the special view 2 variable display game from being changed to a losing result. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes a first special result, the fluctuation time is adjusted so that whichever is more advantageous is derived as compared with the first special result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game You may do so.

  From the above, when the first determination means (game control apparatus 100) determines the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) in the normal state (normal gaming state), Determining the variation mode of the first variation display game with reference to whether or not the variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is being executed and / or the variation mode information of the second variation display game It will be possible.

  In addition, the fluctuation mode information of the first fluctuation display game or the second fluctuation display game includes information on fluctuation time that can specify the execution time of the fluctuation display game, and the first determination means is in the normal state (normal game When determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the state), if the second variation display game is being executed, the variation included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game It will be possible to determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game with reference to time.

  Further, in the fluctuation mode information of the first fluctuation display game or the second fluctuation display game, information on fluctuation time that can specify the execution time of the fluctuation display game, and information on fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time In the case of determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal state (normal gaming state), the first determination means is included without referring to the variation mode information of the second variation display game. The first variation mode determination means (game control device 100) capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game, and the variation time of the first variation display game by the first variation mode determination means When the second variation display game is being executed when the variation mode information is determined, it is determined with reference to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game. And it has a second variation mode determining means it is possible to re-determine information about variation pattern without changing the fluctuation time of the first variable display games (gaming controller 100), and further comprising a.

  Further, the second variation mode determining means does not re-determine the information on the variation pattern when the result of the second variation display game being executed does not become a special result.

  Further, the decoration variation display game execution control means (effect control device 300) corresponds to the first variation display game when the state of the second variation display game at the start of the first variation display game satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to execute a special effect lottery that determines whether or not to perform special effects in the decoration variation display game to be executed.

  Further, when the second variation display game is being executed at the start of the first variation display game, and the result of the second variation display game is released, the ornament variation display game execution control means performs the first variation display game execution control means It will be possible to execute a special effect lottery that determines whether or not to perform special effects in the decorative variation display game to be executed corresponding to the variable display game.

  In the above embodiment, the second start memory for suspending the start of the special view 2 variable display game is not generated for the special view 2 variable display game, but it is the same as the special view 1 variable display game The second start storage may be generated up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition, the normal fluctuation winning device which can be converted to the second start winning opening 37, the closed state in which the gaming ball is hard to win or can not win, and the open state in which the gaming ball is easier to win or can win than the closed state. May be provided. Then, in the specific gaming state in which the game is advanced mainly by the special view 2 fluctuation display game, the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device per unit time may be controlled to be substantially longer than that in the normal gaming state. .

First Modification
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the display mode of the number-of-games information display unit 85 and the symbol for effect.

  As described above, when the progress of the game is displayed only with the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game and the game number information display section 85, the conventional figure fluctuation display game is not executed simultaneously There is a possibility that it becomes difficult for the player who is used to the gaming machine to grasp the progress of the game. For this reason, in this modification, the clear information display is not performed in the number-of-games information display section 85 at least during the period in which the special view 1 variation display game based on the first start storage is executed from the end of the special game state. I have to.

  FIG. 105 shows the execution of the special view variation display game and the change in the display of the number-of-games information display unit 85, and FIGS. 106 and 107 show the display on the display device 41. FIG. In the ending period (t61) of the first special gaming state shown in FIG. 105, notification that the specific gaming state is started is performed as shown in FIG. 106 (a). In this example, there are three first start memories at the end of the first special game state, and as shown in FIG. 105, the special drawing based on the first first start memory with the end of the first special game state The variable display game is started (t62). In addition, the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation display of the effect design are also started.

  Furthermore, while the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed, the gaming ball is winning in the second start winning opening 37, and the special figure 2 variation display game is started (t63). In addition, the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is also started. That is, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed at the same time. In addition, the symbol for effect which started the fluctuation display with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game changes while the fluctuation display is continued as shown in FIG. 106 (b) even when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started. I do not.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the special view 2 variation display game is ended earlier than the special view 1 variation display game, and a second special result (small hit) is obtained. Therefore, the special figure 1 variation display game is forced to be stopped at the result of disengaging with the end of the special figure 2 variation display game (t64). At this time, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game are stopped in the result mode corresponding to the result of each game, and the design symbol is the second special result Stop in the result mode corresponding to

  In the game up to this point, the special view variation display game is executed twice, but the effect design symbol starts at the start of the special view 1 variation display game and stops at the stop of the special view 2 variation display game. Therefore, it appears to the player that one special figure variation display game, which is the second special result, has been played. By doing this, it becomes possible to convey the progress and contents of the game in an easy-to-understand manner to a player who is used to a conventional gaming machine that does not simultaneously execute the special figure variation display game.

  Further, the display in the number-of-games information display section 58 is started with the end of the first special game state (t62), but here it is displayed as "under preparation" to clarify the display of the number of remaining games and the number of executions. It becomes the preparation mode display which is not performed. In a period in which there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed, if information on the actual number of games is displayed, the change becomes complicated and the player can not understand it or the disbelief The game number information is not displayed clearly here because there is a risk of feeling a sense. The preparation mode display is continued until at least the special view 1 variation display game based on the first start memory stored at the end of the first special game state is ended, and here the first start memory It has become (t67) until special game state ends in a state where is not present.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105, after the end of the second special game state, the special view 1 variation display game based on the second first start memory is started (t65). Similarly to the special view 1 change display game based on the first first start memory, the special view 1 change display game is also forcibly stopped at the result of the special view 2 change display game being the second special result. , And the second special gaming state (t65 to t66). The same applies to the third first starting memory (t66 to t67).

  The contents of the display on the display device 41 in the period of t65 to t66 and t66 to t67 are the same as the display at t62 to 65 as shown in FIGS. 106 (d) and 106 (e), for example. In the information display section 85, "Preparing" is displayed, the effect design starts at the start of the special view 1 variation display game, and stops in the result mode corresponding to the second special result based on the stop of the special view 2 variation display game Do.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 105, when the special game state ends in the state where the first start memory does not exist (t67), the special game 2 variation display game is mainly executed thereafter, and the timing for digesting the number of games is Since it becomes the same as the conventional gaming machine which does not execute the special figure fluctuation display game simultaneously, it becomes RUSH display mode which displays the information of the number of games by the number-of-games information display part 85 from here.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 107 (a), “RUSH start” is displayed to indicate that the RUSH display mode has been entered, and the number-of-games remaining display is displayed on the number-of-games information display section 85. However, the number of remaining games smaller than the actual number of remaining games is displayed. Here, although the actual number of remaining games is 43, it is displayed as 40.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 105, the number of remaining games in the number-of-games information display section 85 is subtracted each time the special figure variation display game is executed (FIG. 107 (c)). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), a display for instructing to operate the effect button 25 at a predetermined timing is made. When the player operates the effect button 25 in accordance with the instruction, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), an effect is produced in which the dragon fires the game number information display section 85 as effect display, as shown in FIG. 107 (f). An additional effect is performed in which the value of the number-of-games information display section 85 is added so that the actual number of remaining games is reached.

  The actual number of remaining games may be displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode (t67). In addition, although the actual number of remaining games is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 25, a predetermined value such that the value of the number-of-games information display section 85 becomes smaller than the actual number of remaining games based on the operation of the effect button 25 You may add a value.

  In addition, it is preferable that the number of games to be reduced from the actual number of remaining games be the upper limit number (here, 4) of the first start memory as displayed on the number-of-games information display section 85 at the start of RUSH mode. . When it is possible to store the second starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for the special figure 2 variable display game, a value obtained by adding the upper limit number of the first starting memory and the upper limit number of the second starting memory (for example, 8) or more is preferable.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation indication game and the special figure 2 fluctuation indication game are executed simultaneously in the RUSH indication mode, as with t62-t65, making the design symbol for one fluctuation indication, game number information indicatory department The subtraction of the number of remaining games at 85 may be one, which may be easily understood by the player. By making the number of remaining games displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode smaller than the actual number of remaining games, it becomes possible to set the subtraction of the number of remaining games to 1 in such a case. However, if the number of remaining games currently displayed and the actual number of remaining games match, the subtraction of the number of remaining games is set to 2 or the RUSH display mode after a predetermined period as the preparation mode display again. It is preferable to make the transition so that no contradiction arises.

  From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a game number information informing means (effect control device 300) capable of informing the game number information which is information according to the subtraction result by the subtraction means (effect control device 300). The game number information notification means notifies the game number information at least until the end of the first variable display game based on the first start memory stored at the end of the first special game state. It will not be.

Second Modified Example
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modification, the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process are performed at different interrupt timings.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 108 is performed instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In this timer interrupt process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process performed in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process is performed in the main routine of the timer interrupt process (step X801).

  Further, in the branch processing by the special processing counter (step X802), if the value of the special processing counter is even, special processing 1 game processing is performed (step X110), and if it is odd special processing 2 game processing (step X111) )I do. 0 is treated as an even number. Thereafter, the special processing processing counter is updated by +1 (step X803).

  The special processing processing counter may be updated one after another in the range of 0 to 255, may be one in which 0 and 1 are alternately updated, and may be one in which it is updated in an even number of value ranges. Also, since the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are alternately performed for each timer interrupt, these processes are performed every double time (here 8 ms) of the timer interrupt process time (here 4 ms) It will be done. Therefore, the setting of the timer value updated by these processes is performed in consideration of this.

  FIGS. 109 and 110 show the special view 1 game process and the special view 2 game process in this modification. In these processes, the processes of steps Y101, Y102, Y131, and Y132 performed in the processes of FIGS. 37 and 38 are not performed.

  FIG. 111 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring process in this modification. The special winning opening switch monitoring process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 39 except that the process (step Y1501) of determining the hit situation of the special figure is performed. In the process (step Y1501) of determining the hit situation of the special figure, it is determined which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is the process for the special result derived, and according to the determination result Set the target special figure. If it is not necessary to distinguish which special map is to be processed, the process (step Y1501) of determining the hit situation of the special map may not be performed.

  From the above, it is possible to execute an interrupt routine started in a predetermined cycle, and the first variable display game (special game 1 variable display game) is executed by the first variable display game control means (game control apparatus 100). The second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) can be executed by the second variable display game control means (game control apparatus 100) even if the second variable display game control means is present, and the second variable display game control means Even when the variable display game is being executed, the first variable display game can be executed by the first variable display game control means, and a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game by the first variable display game control means And a series of execution control related to the second variable display game by the second variable display game control means so as not to execute simultaneously in one interrupt routine And thus it was. As a result, the processing time can be shortened even when simultaneous fluctuation is performed.

Third Modified Example
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modification, the processing contents in the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIG. 27 to FIG. 29 are different, and instead of the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation number, the second start winning opening 37 in the normal gaming state. The same determination as that of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is made on the basis of the special figure 2 abnormal prize number counted based on the prize winning.

  FIG. 112 shows an example of counting the special figure 2 abnormal winning number. The special figure 2 abnormal winning number is updated by +1 based on the winning on the second start winning opening 37 in the normal gaming state (t101, t102). And, when the special figure 2 abnormal prize number reaches 5 which is specified value, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, external information which shows that special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurs on the basis of this flag and the game machine error The output of the state signal to the device outside the gaming machine is started, and it becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation with the management device of the game arcade or the like. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display, voice or the like.

  In addition, from the time when the special figure 2 abnormal prize number reaches 5 which is specified value timekeeping with special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation information timer is started (t102), when predetermined time (here 60 seconds) elapses ( At t103), the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error status signal is stopped. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 ends notification of the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation based on the reception of this command. When a winning on the second start winning opening 37 newly occurs before the elapse of a predetermined time, counting of the predetermined time is newly started from that time.

  113 and 114 show an example of counting of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number. As shown in FIG. 113, the valid / invalid state of the monitoring state is set, and when the monitoring state is valid, there is a winning on the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 abnormal winning The number is updated by +1 (t113, t116).

  This monitoring state is basically effective in the case of a low probability state. However, if there is a winning on the second start winning opening 37 (t113, t116) while the monitoring status is valid, the predetermined invalid setting period (10 seconds in this case) is invalidated from the winning (t113). The winnings (t114) to the second start winning opening 37 generated in the invalid setting period (t113 to t115) are not counted as the number of abnormal winnings. Also, during the first special game state is invalidated. Further, the second special game state in the low probability state is effective because it is a short period.

  When the special figure 2 abnormal prize number is not newly added over a predetermined clear period (t117 to t118, here, 1800 seconds) from the end of the above-mentioned invalidation setting period, It is supposed to be cleared. It is also cleared when the first special game state is started.

  FIG. 114 shows the counting of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number at the end of the specific gaming state. In the high probability state, since the monitoring state is invalidated, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not added even if there is a winning on the second start winning opening 37. And about the last special figure fluctuation display game in a high probability state, although a probability state will be changed into a low probability state at the time of the start of the special figure fluctuation display game (t123), the special figure fluctuation display game Until the end (t124), it remains in the invalid state.

  Here, since it becomes an effective state from the end of the last special figure fluctuation display game started in the high probability state, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is the second special result, the second special game It becomes effective state from the start of the state (t124). In this second special game state, since the player is to hit the right after the specific game state, a winning on the second start winning opening 37 occurs and the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is added (t125). However, since the second special game state ends in a short time, and the invalidation setting period is set from the addition of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number (t 125 to t 127), in the second special game state The special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not added in the subsequent winning on the second start winning opening 37 (t 126). Therefore, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number added in the second special game state is limited to 1 and is not cleared after the clearing period (t127 to t128) elapses.

  In order to enable such processing, in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing of FIG. 27, instead of the processing of steps X381 to X389, winning on the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the monitoring state is effective. The special figure 2 abnormal winning a prize number is renewed by +1 on the basis of. Then, in the process of steps X390 to X403, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is used instead of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number.

  In addition, the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal prize number which will perform special figure 2 abnormal change information, and the length of the clear period can be set arbitrarily. The specified value or the length of the period set here may be any value as long as the player can not aim for the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state. Also, if a power failure occurs and is restored, monitoring is resumed from the state before the power failure. In addition, even when special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation information is done, the prize balls are paid out normally for winning.

Fourth Modified Example
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modification, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are simultaneously executed, the other special feature is derived based on the derivation of the special result in one special figure variation display game. The figure variation display game is interrupted, and the special figure variation display game interrupted after the end of the special game state is resumed.

  FIG. 115 shows the batch display device 50 in the gaming machine of the present modification. About D1-D18, it is the same as FIG. D19 and D20 are the interruption display part 79 which shows the presence or absence of interruption of a special figure change display game. In this interruption display unit 79, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game is interrupted, and the special view 1 variation display game is interrupted. A state, the special figure 2 change display game shows any one of the state interrupted.

  FIG. 116 shows an example in which the special view variation display game is interrupted, and FIGS. 117 and 118 show displays on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50. In this example, first, as shown in FIG. 116, the special display 2 variation display game b is started with neither the special view 1 variation display game nor the special view 2 variation display game being executed. Then, the variable display game a, which is a special view 1 variable display game, is started (t152).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 117 (a), the special display 1 display unit 51 and the special display 2 display unit 52 are in a state in which variable display is performed. In addition, the interruption display unit 79 is in a state in which all are turned off. Further, on the display device 41, fluctuation display of the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116, the first special result is derived as a result before the variable display game b is derived and the variable display game a is ended (t153), and the first special game state is performed after a predetermined stop time has elapsed. (T154). Based on the derivation of the first special result, the variable display game b is interrupted (t153). During the interruption, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted and the fluctuation display is continued. Further, during the interruption, the interruption display unit 79 displays that the special view 2 variation display game is interrupted.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), when the variable display game a derives the first special result and is stopped, a special result aspect corresponding to the first special result is displayed on the special view 1 display 51. It becomes. Further, the special view 2 display 52 remains in the variable display. Furthermore, in the interruption display unit 79, D20 is turned on to indicate that the special view 2 variation display game is being interrupted. In addition, in the display device 41, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is stopped in the special result mode corresponding to the first special result, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game remains performing the variable display. Also, as shown in FIG. 117 (c) and FIG. 118 (a), the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52 and the interruption display 79 shown in FIG. 117 (b) are in the special gaming state. The display mode is the same as when the result is derived.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116, when the first special gaming state ends, the fluctuation display game b interrupted is resumed, and measurement of fluctuation time is resumed (t155). Then, the fluctuation display game b is ended based on the passage of the remaining fluctuation time (t157). In addition, after the end of the first special game state, a variation display game c is newly started in the special view 1 variation display game. Although the variable display game c is stopped before the variable display game b (t156), the variable display game b is continued without being interrupted because the result is a loss.

  As shown in FIGS. 117 (b) and (c), with the end of the special game state, variable display is performed on the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52. Further, in the interruption display unit 79, all of the special figure 2 variable display games are turned off by being resumed, and it is in a state showing that the interruption is not interrupted.

  Thus, by interrupting the other special view fluctuation display game based on the derivation of the special result in one special view fluctuation display game, by resuming the special view fluctuation display game interrupted after the end of the special gaming state It becomes possible to derive the result as determined by the lottery performed at the start of each special image variation display game. In addition, during the interruption of the special figure fluctuation display game, a signal may be output during interruption as external information, and information for determining which one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is interrupted is also outputted. It is good.

  In order to perform processing related to the interruption of such a special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 during fluctuation processing shown in FIG. 119 is performed instead of the special figure 1 during fluctuation processing shown in FIG. In the special figure 1 during variation process, when the special figure 2 is also being executed (step Y630; Y), the special figure 2 suspension flag is not executed during the special figure 2 variation display game of steps Y631 to Y639. Is saved (step Y1511).

  In addition, the special figure 2 during fluctuation processing shown in FIG. 120 is performed instead of the special figure 2 during fluctuation processing shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 during fluctuation processing, when the special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), the special figure 1 interruption flag during the special figure 1 interruption display step of steps Y661 to Y669 is not performed. Is saved (step Y1512).

  Also, in place of the special figure 1 game process shown in FIG. 39, the special figure 1 game process shown in FIG. 121 is performed. In this special figure 1 game processing, it is determined whether there is a special figure 1 interruption flag (step Y1513), and there is no special figure 1 interruption flag (step Y1513; N), that is, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game If the interruption is not performed, the processing relating to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in step Y103 and subsequent steps is performed. On the other hand, when there is a special figure 1 suspension flag (step Y1513; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is suspended, the processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game of steps Y103 to Y118 is not performed. , Step Y119. As a result, the special figure 1 variation display game does not progress during the interruption of the special figure 1 variation display game (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variation display is continued.

  Also, in place of the special figure 2 game process shown in FIG. 40, the special figure 2 game process shown in FIG. 122 is performed. In this special figure 2 game processing, it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 interruption flag (step Y1514), and there is no special figure 2 interruption flag (step Y1514; N), that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When the interruption is not performed, the processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game in step Y133 and subsequent steps is performed. On the other hand, when there is a special figure 2 suspension flag (step Y1514; Y), that is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is suspended, the processing relating to the special figure 2 variation display game of steps Y133 to Y149 is not performed. , And proceeds to step Y152. As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game does not progress while the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variation display is continued.

  Further, in place of the special figure 1 big hit end process shown in FIG. 82, the special figure 1 big hit end process shown in FIG. 123 is performed. In the special view 1 big hit end process, a process (step Y 1515) of clearing the special figure 2 interruption flag is performed. As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game interrupted after the end of the first special gaming state is resumed.

  Further, in place of the special figure 2 big hit end process shown in FIG. 83, the special figure 2 big hit end process shown in FIG. 124 is performed. In this special view 2 big hit end process, a process (step Y1517) to clear the special view 1 interruption flag is performed. As a result, the special view 1 variation display game interrupted after the end of the first special game state is resumed.

  Also, in place of the special figure 1 small hit termination process shown in FIG. 87, the special figure 1 small hit termination process shown in FIG. 125 is performed. In the special figure 1 small hitting end process, a process (step Y1518) of clearing the special figure 2 interruption flag is performed. As a result, the special view 2 variation display game interrupted after the end of the second special game state is resumed.

  Also, in place of the special figure 2 small hit termination process shown in FIG. 88, special figure 2 small hit termination process shown in FIG. 126 is performed. In the special figure 2 small hitting end process, a process (step Y 1519) of clearing the special figure 1 interruption flag is performed. As a result, the special view 1 variation display game interrupted after the end of the second special game state is resumed.

  It should be noted that in the special game state which is performed during the interruption of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the notice effect may be performed on the result of the interrupted special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the fluctuation pattern. Further, when there is the first start memory, the pre-reading effect about the first start memory may be performed during the special game state.

  FIG. 127 shows an example of a pattern using different control methods depending on the situation as to how to control the other special figure fluctuation display game based on the special result being derived in one special figure fluctuation display game. showed that. Here, the control method 1 is a control method for forcibly stopping the other special figure fluctuation display game based on the fact that the special result is derived in one special figure fluctuation display game. The control method 2 is a control method for interrupting the other special view variation display game based on the derivation of the special result in one special view variation display game and resuming after the end of the special game state.

  Pattern 1 shown in FIG. 127 (a) is a pattern for setting the control method in accordance with the type of special view. In this pattern, when the special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped at the out-of-range result (control method 1). On the other hand, when the special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the end of the special game state (control method 2 ).

  In particular, when a big hit is derived in the special figure 1 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly stopped by the result of disengaging (control method 1), when the high probability state is started. It is possible for the player to advance the game in an advantageous manner. That is, assuming that control method 2 is used in this case, the variation time started in the low probability state at the start of the high probability state restarts the special figure 2 variation display game for a long time, so a new special figure 2 variation display It will be difficult to start the game. In the high probability state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened, and the special result is generated frequently so that it is a period during which the player can obtain a large number of prize balls. As a result, the start of a new special view 2 variable display game is accelerated, and the game proceeds in an advantageous manner for the player.

  Pattern 2 shown in FIG. 127 (b) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the special result. In this pattern, for example, when the first special result (big hit) is derived in one of the special figure fluctuation display games, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped at the disengaging result (control method 1) . On the other hand, when the second special result (small hit) is derived in one of the special figure fluctuation display games, the other special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted and resumed after the end of the special gaming state (control Method 2). The control method may be selected in consideration of the special drawing type.

  Pattern 3 shown in FIG. 127 (c) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the hit type. For example, when the big hit symbol 1A or the small hit symbol 1a is derived in the special view 1 change display game, the special view 2 change display game is forcibly stopped at the result of the disconnection (control method 1). On the other hand, when the big hit symbol 1B or the small hit symbol 1b is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the end of the special game state (control method 2 ). Note that the control method may be set depending on whether it is the first special result or the second special result.

  Pattern 4 shown in FIG. 127 (d) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the gaming state and the special view type. When a special result is derived in the special view 1 change display game in the normal gaming state, the special view 2 change display game is forcibly stopped at the result of the removal (control method 1). On the other hand, when the special result is derived in the special view 2 change display game in the normal gaming state, the special view 1 change display game is interrupted and resumed after the end of the special play state (control method 2). Further, in the specific gaming state (during ST), control method 2 is used regardless of the type of special drawing or the type of special result.

  In this example, the special figure 2 variation display game is forced to be stopped in the normal game state so that it becomes disadvantageous to the player and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game. It is like that. In addition, with regard to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which becomes the main body in the normal gaming state, the special result is not changed into the removal by the forced stop. In addition, since the specific gaming state is an advantageous state for the player, the special result is not changed to be canceled due to the forced stop for any special view variation display game, and the player achieves maximum profit. I am trying to get In addition, in consideration of the profit balance with the game arcade, the special figure 1 variable display game which is not the main player in the specific gaming state is forcibly stopped to prevent the player from earning an excessive profit. It is also good. Further, the control method may be set only by the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state, only the control method 1 may be set, and in the specific gaming state, only the control method 2 may be set.

  Pattern 5 shown in FIG. 127 (e) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the gaming state, the special drawing type, and the special result type. In the normal gaming state, the second special result is derived in one of the special figure fluctuation display games so that the special result of the other special figure fluctuation display game is not changed to the out result. Also, in the specific gaming state, the first special result is derived in one of the special figure fluctuation display games so that the special result of the other special figure fluctuation display game is not changed to the out-of-round result, I try to increase the value of special results.

  The patterns of the control method are not limited to those listed here, and may be other patterns. In addition, although the special drawing type, the type of special result, the game state and the like are listed as parameters of the control method selection, the present invention is not limited to this, and other parameters may be considered. Other parameters include the number of games since the end of the special gaming state, calendar information such as date and day, current time, and achievement of certain conditions in the game such as generating a predetermined number of outreach.

  When the control method is selected as shown in FIG. 127, in the special figure 1 during the process shown in FIG. 119, when the special figure 2 is also being executed (step Y630; Y), according to the conditions. A process is performed to select which of interruption and termination. Then, when interruption is selected, special flag 2 interruption flag saving processing is performed (step Y 1511), and processing after step Y 640 is performed. Further, when the end is selected, the processing for stopping the special view 2 variation display game of steps Y631 to Y639 shown in FIG. 62 is performed, and the processing after step Y640 is performed.

  Also, in the special figure 2 fluctuation processing shown in FIG. 120, if special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y 660; Y), processing to select either interruption or end depending on the condition is performed. Make it Then, when interruption is selected, special flag 1 interruption flag saving processing is performed (step Y1512), and processing after step Y670 is performed. Further, when the end is selected, the processing for stopping the special view 1 variation display game of the steps Y661 to Y669 shown in FIG. 63 is performed, and the processing after the step Y670 is performed.

  That is, after the game control apparatus 100 terminates the one variable display game as a result other than the special result, and after stopping the one variable display game and ending the special game state based on the other variable display game, It constitutes selection means for selecting and executing any one of restart control for restarting one of the variable display games which has been interrupted based on a predetermined condition.

  From the above, one of the fluctuation display game execution control means is one of the first fluctuation display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the second fluctuation display game execution control means (game control device 100). When execution control of the display game (special figure variation display game) is performed, the other variation display game of which execution control is being performed by the other variation display game execution control means has a special result. End control to end the variable display game as a result other than the special result, and one of the variable display games interrupted after the special game state based on the other variable display game is interrupted by interrupting one of the variable display games The game control apparatus 100 is provided with selection means (game control apparatus 100) which selects and executes any one of restart control for resuming and on the basis of a predetermined condition.

  The selection means is controlled by the second variable display game execution control means when the first variable display game execution control means is executing control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). After the special game state based on the second variable display game is ended by interrupting the first variable display game when the second variable display game being played (special figure 2 variable display game) is a special result The first fluctuation display is performed when the restart control for resuming the first fluctuation display game interrupted is selected and executed, and the second fluctuation display game execution control means executes the execution control of the second fluctuation display game. If the first variable display game being subjected to execution control by the game execution control means becomes a special result, select and execute the end control to end the second variable display game as a result other than the special result The it has to so that.

  In addition, the selection means selects and executes the end control to end one variable display game as a result other than the special result when the other variable display game has the first special result, and the other variable display game Is a second special result, restart control of restarting one of the variable display games which was interrupted after the special game state based on the other variable display game is ended by interrupting one of the variable display games Is selected and executed.

  In addition, when the second variation display game execution control unit performs execution control of the second variation display game when the selection unit is in the specific gaming state, the execution control is performed by the first variation display game execution control unit. If the first variable display game being played has a special result, the second fluctuation display game is interrupted and the second fluctuation is interrupted after the special game state based on the first fluctuation display game is ended. This means that the restart control for resuming the display game is selected and executed.

  In addition, fluctuation mode information of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game includes information on fluctuation time that can specify the execution time of the fluctuation display game, and the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game For each of the above, the measurement means starts measuring the fluctuation time according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and when the measurement time passes the fluctuation time, the measurement means (game control device 100 ends the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game And the first variable display game execution control means and the second variable display game execution control means end the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display game being executed according to the measurement means ending the measurement of the fluctuation time. The measurement means is configured such that, when restart control is selected by the selection means, one of the variable display games is based on the other variable display game becoming a special result. Of interrupting the measurement of the variation time, so that the special game state based on the other of the variable display games so as to resume the measurement of the variation time of one variation display game that was interrupted at the end of completion.

Fifth Modification
Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modification, the display method and configuration of the collective display device 50 are different.

  FIG. 128 shows a display method of the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 at the start of fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 128 (a), when starting the variation display of the next special figure variation display game from the state in which the previous special figure variation display game's release or the result mode of the special result is displayed, Start from the state of In this way, it can be immediately recognized that the fluctuation has started. Although all off and off symbols are repeated during the change, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), all off and symbols not to be used as a result may be repeated. For example, even if it starts from any point, it will be immediately understood that the change has started. In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured to have different patterns, such as an off symbol, a symbol that is initially lit at the start of fluctuation, and a symbol displayed during fluctuation display.

  FIG. 129 shows another example of the configuration of the batch display device 50. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 129 (a), in the collective display device 50, the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 are each formed of a plurality of LEDs linearly arranged. In addition, LEDs q to t that function as the storage display unit 54 for notifying the start memory number of the special view 1 fluctuation display game, and the LEDu having the functions of the round display unit 60, the first gaming state display unit 77, and the probability display unit 78 ~ X is provided. Note that this other function may be assigned.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (b), in the special view 1 display 51, turning on the LEDs a, b constitutes a misaligned symbol, and during the variable display, this dislocated symbol and all off are repeated. Further, as shown in FIG. 129 (c), in the special view 2 display 52, turning on only the LEDi constitutes a misplaced symbol, and during the variable display, this dislocated symbol and all off are repeated. As described above, the special symbol 1 variation display game's off symbol and the special symbol 2 variation display game's off symbol are different.

  Moreover, as a display mode in the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 which were comprised in this way, display modes other than having mentioned above may be sufficient, for example, blink or alternating one or several LED. The adjacent LEDs may be sequentially turned on and off so that light may flow along the direction from the LED at one end to the LED at the other end, repeating lighting and off symbols and all lighting. Further, as shown in FIG. 130, the number of LEDs may be different between the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52. In this case, it is possible to control so that the time for light to flow from the LED at one end to the LED at the other end is the same in any of the special view displays. That is, the special figure 2 indicator 52 having a larger number of LEDs than the special figure 1 indicator 51 may increase the speed of light flow. Of course, the speed at which the light flows may be the same. In addition, it is possible to make the design which is off and the design which is fluctuating different.

  When the number of LEDs is different between the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 indicator 52, more result modes can be set for the larger special view. That is, as in the present embodiment, when there are a plurality of small hits due to different opening modes, the game ball is made to win the special figure 2 start winning opening 37 by right hitting to such an extent that it is not determined to be incorrect in the normal state. It is highly possible that the fraudulent act of aiming at the first special variation winning device 38 is performed when looking at the LED of the special view 2 display 52 after a predetermined variation time has elapsed and it is a result mode corresponding to the long opening. On the other hand, if the number of LEDs of the special view 2 display 52 is increased, for example, the small hit result aspect can be set more, and the player can easily recognize the long open result aspect. It is possible to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

  FIG. 131 shows another example of the configuration of the batch display device 50. The batch display device 50 includes LEDs a to y and z1 to z4. And the covering member 95 which consists of a seal | sticker or board | plate material so that the front surface of the package display apparatus 50 may be covered is attached to the front surface. In this covering member 95, the portions of the LEDs a to y, which are portions used during the game, are transparent, so that it can be seen that the LEDs are present at a glance. It should be noted that it may be understood that the LED is present at a glance, and in addition to being transparent, it may be translucent or may be hollowed out.

  In addition, on the covering member 95, a display indicating the function of the LED is provided adjacent to the necessary part of the part where the presence of the LED is apparent at first glance, for example, the LEDu forming the round display portion 60 At positions adjacent to x, the number of rounds notified when each is lit is displayed.

  The LEDs z1 to z4 which are not used during the game are concealed by the covering member 95 so that it can be seen that there is no LED present at first glance. The LEDs z1 to z4 may not be used at all as a function of the gaming machine. However, if there is a problem due to the presence of the unused LED, for example, it is used as the LED for notifying the initialization of the RAM, and for the part covering the LEDs z1 to z4 of the covering member 95, And make the lighting condition semitransparent so that the lighting condition can be confirmed.

  By setting the functions of the respective LEDs and the configuration of the covering member 95 according to the model by using the collective display device 50 and the covering member 95 as described above, the collective display device 50 can be commonly used even for different models. It can be used.

  FIG. 132 shows another example of the configurations of the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the batch display device 50. As shown in FIG. 132 (a), the arrangement of the LEDs of the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 is different.

  In such a configuration, even if the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 share the numbers of the LEDs to be lit for the result aspect and the symbols in the variation, they are different in design from the differently shaped design can do. For example, FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which a shifted symbol is displayed on both the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52. It is said that the LEDs 2 and 5 are turned on in this special symbol display in any of the special symbol displays, but since the arrangement of the LEDs is different, the display has a symbol of another shape. Thereby, even if symbol data common to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 can be used, it can be a symbol of another shape on the display, and various data can be expressed using common data be able to.

  FIG. 132 (b) shows the display during fluctuation in the special view 1 display 51. In the display during fluctuation, all the lights off and the lighting of a predetermined LED are repeated. Here, before reaching the reach (in the first half fluctuation), all off and lighting of the LEDs 6 and 7 are repeated, and during N reaching, all off and lighting of the LEDs 2 and 5 are repeated. In addition, all the lights off and lighting of the LEDs 1 and 3 are repeated during the SP1 reach, and all lights off and the lighting of the LEDs 4 and 8 are repeated during the SP2 reach. A variety of effects can be performed by making the lighting parts different according to the fluctuation pattern as described above.

  In addition, for example, when it becomes SP1 reach, it may be set as a display mode which repeats lighting of LED1 and 3 and lighting all the lights before reach occurrence, and it may be made to notice an occurrence of reach in a special view display. In addition, it is possible to provide the lighting feature which indicates the occurrence of the big hit as indication or definite notification as the lighting feature during fluctuation, and to indicate or give the occurrence of the big hit in the special view display.

  FIG. 133 shows another example of the configurations of the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the batch display device 50. As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the special view 1 display unit 51 is formed of LEDs arranged in a ring shape, and light is displayed so as to circulate during variable display. And the display of a result mode is performed by lighting one or several LED. Of course, the special figure 2 display 52 also has the same configuration. Further, the special view display may form some design, and in the example shown in FIG. 133 (b), for example, the shape of a mushroom is formed.

Sixth Modification
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modification, the contents of the game are different.

  As shown in FIG. 134, in this modification, there are four gaming states of low probability disadvantageous mode M1, high probability adverse mode M2, high probability advantageous mode M3 and low probability advantageous mode M4, and based on derivation of a special result etc. These gaming states are to be transitioned. Here, the low probability in the name of each gaming state means a low probability state, and the high probability means a high probability state. Furthermore, the disadvantage is that the fluctuation time is set to a very long time (about 10 minutes) in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, so the probability of occurrence of a small hit is low and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game disadvantageous to the player Means to play the game with In addition, advantageous means that the long variation is not set in the special figure 2 variation display game, the probability of occurrence of small hits is high, and the game is advanced mainly by the special figure 2 variation display game advantageous to the player. .

  The low probability disadvantageous mode M1 is a gaming state corresponding to the normal gaming state, and the high probability advantageous mode M3 is a gaming state corresponding to the specific gaming state. Further, the high probability disadvantage mode M2 is a so-called latent state, and is an effect condition where it can not be clearly determined whether the player is in the low probability disadvantage mode M1 or the high probability disadvantage mode M2. The effect state is also set when the player wins 2R normal or small hit in the low probability disadvantageous mode M1. The low certainty mode M4 is similar to the time saving state in a conventional gaming machine. In this gaming state, since the game is advanced mainly by the special view 2 variation display game, it is possible to wait for the next big hit without reducing the balls by the occurrence of the high frequency of the small hit.

  Further, the hit types in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are as shown in FIG. Among them, the probability variation big hit is a big hit that will be a high probability state until 50 special view variation display games are executed after the end of the special game status, and a normal big hit is a big hit that will be a low probability status after the end of the special game state. It is.

  The number of balls obtained in a small hit and the fluctuation time may be adjusted so that the balls tend to increase in the low probability advantageous mode M4. This low probability advantage mode M4 continues until the next big hit, so it lasts a long time, and it can be a game mode in which the ball is gradually increased during this time, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time in the special game state. You can play different games. Furthermore, in the case of right-handed driving, winning of both the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 is possible, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which usually becomes a big hit in the low probability advantage mode M4 is started In this case, a special result may be generated in the special view 2 change display game to block a normal big hit of the special view 1 change display game, and a notification may be provided to prompt the user to maintain the low probability advantage mode M4.

  In the gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states as described above, the effect control device 300 sets effects according to the gaming state. However, when the effect control device 300 is restarted due to any cause, the effect control device 300 without the backup function loses the information on the gaming state, so that it is not possible to perform an appropriate effect. In order to minimize the inconvenience due to such a situation, the game control device 100 transmits information on the game state to the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing.

  When the gaming state is switched, the game control device 100 causes the effect control device 300 to start the special gaming state and start the special view variation display game when the gaming state is switched, as shown in FIG. 135 (a). Send. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), at the start (t171) of the special figure variation display game when the gaming state is low probability disadvantage, a command of A801h which is a probability information command indicating low probability disadvantage Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Also, at the start (t 172) of the special gaming state that has occurred in the case of low probability disadvantage, a command of A801h, which is a probability information command indicating low probability disadvantage, is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Here, since the result was a probability change big hit, the game state shifts to a high probability advantageously by the end of the special game state. Along with this, a command of A802h which is a probability information command indicating that it is highly probable is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t173). Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 performs an effect with high certainty and advantage.

  Then, at the start (T174, t175) of the special figure variation display game when the gaming state is high probability advantage, the effect control command of A802h which is a probability information command indicating high probability advantage is sent to the effect control device 300 Send. Thereafter, the power of the effect control device 300 is shut off due to some cause (t176), and the display on the display device 41 is not performed (black display). Also during this time, the game is progressing in the game control apparatus 100, but the decoration special figure variation display game or the like on the display device 41 is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the power of the effect control device 300 is restored, the effect control device 300 is activated (t177). The effect control device 300 displays the restored image on the display device 41 until any command is received from the game control device 100 (t177 to t178). Then, upon receiving from the game control device 100 a command of A802h which is a probability information command indicating a high probability advantage with the start of the special figure variation display game, the decoration special figure variation display game is started with a high probability advantageous effect. To do (t 178). By doing this, it is possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state without waiting for the probability information command based on the change in the gaming state to be transmitted.

  Further, in the case where the game control apparatus 100 is in a state where neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed for the customer waiting command shown in FIG. 136 (a) including the information of the gaming state. It transmits to the effect control apparatus 300 at the time of a certain customer waiting setting. As shown in FIG. 136 (b), the power of the effect control device 300 is cut off for some reason (t181), and then the power of the effect control device 300 is restored and the effect control device 300 is activated ((t)). t 182).

  If the special view variation display game is started after the effect control device 300 is restored, the probability information command including the information on the gaming state is transmitted as described above, so that it is possible to return to the rendering according to the gaming state. The customer waiting setting is made in a state where neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (t184).

  The game control device 100 transmits a command 8002h, which is a customer waiting command indicating that the customer waiting is set to be highly advantageous, and the effect control device 300 has a high certainty advantage based on the information of the customer waiting command. Set the stage and wait for customers. By doing this, it is possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state without waiting for the probability information command based on the change in the gaming state to be transmitted.

Seventh Modified Example
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of the present modification, as shown in FIG. 137 (a), the special cancellation number necessary for subtracting the special fluctuation number of the special figure 2 according to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number making up the abnormal judgment number The values of the special figure 1 variation numbers are made different.

  For example, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is 1, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is made to be 0 because the special figure 1 fluctuation number is 15, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is 4 In some cases, the special figure 1 variation number is 120 so that the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3.

  Here, the required special figure 1 variation number increases as the special figure 2 abnormal variation number increases. When the player has executed a special figure 2 variation display game which causes irregular variation without intention, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number does not increase so much. Therefore, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is small, subtraction of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is easy and it is made difficult to be judged as abnormal. Also, when the player intentionally executes the irregular fluctuation, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number increases. Therefore, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is large, the special figure 2 subtraction of the abnormal fluctuation number is made difficult to be determined as abnormal.

  In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation number is made to double every time the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number increases by one. Thus, the setting of the special figure 1 fluctuation number corresponding to each special drawing 2 abnormal fluctuation number can be realized only by shifting the bit corresponding to, for example, 15 and the control processing becomes simple.

  FIG. 137 (b) shows an example of the change of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number. In this example, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the main fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the irregular fluctuation in the normal game state where the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is 3 and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is 15 It is in the state. When the next special figure 1 variation display game is started from this state (t201), the special figure 1 variation number changes from 15 to 16. Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation number necessary for subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is 60, so the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number remains at 3.

  After that, when the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation is started (t 202), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number changes from 3 to 4. At this time, the special figure 1 variation number necessary for subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is reset and changed from 60 to 120.

  Then, the game proceeds without the special figure 2 variation display game becoming irregular variation being executed, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted from 4 to 3 when the special figure 1 variation number becomes 120 which is the specified value. In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation number is set to 0. Further, 60 is set as a special figure 1 fluctuation number required to newly subtract the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number (t203).

  After that, when the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation is not executed and the game progresses, and the special figure 1 variation number becomes 60, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted from 3 to 2 and the special figure One variation number is set to zero. In addition, 30 is set as the special figure 1 fluctuation number necessary to newly subtract the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number (t204).

[Special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIG. 138 is performed instead of the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches the specified value (step X 384; N) and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by 1 (step X 385), after the update As shown in FIG. 137 (a) according to the special figure 2 abnormal variation number, processing for setting the specified value of the special figure 1 variation number necessary for subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal variation number (step X811) .

  Also, when there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X 387; Y) and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by 1 (step X 389), the figure according to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number after the update. As shown in 137 (a), processing for resetting the specified value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number necessary for subtracting the special drawing 2 abnormal fluctuation number is performed (step X812). When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number becomes 5, since it is set to 4 by the subsequent processing, 120 which is the special figure 1 fluctuation number corresponding to 4 is set.

  From the above, the abnormality determination number management means (game control apparatus 100) is configured such that the number of abnormality cancellations (special figure 1 variation number) increases as the abnormality determination number (special figure 2 abnormal variation number) increases. It becomes. That is, the abnormality judgment number management means updates (subtracts here) the abnormality judgment number in the abnormality cancellation direction as the abnormality judgment number approaches the value satisfying the predetermined condition which means that the countermeasure means performs the predetermined correspondence. This means that the number of required abnormal cancellations is increased.

  Although the required special figure 1 fluctuation number increases as the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number increases, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value can be set arbitrarily. For example, when the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 1 or 2, the special figure 1 variation number necessary for subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 15, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3 or 4. In some cases, the special figure 1 fluctuation number necessary for subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number may be set to 60.

  In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation number necessary for subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number may be determined by lottery. That is, the abnormality determination number management means (game control apparatus 100) may select and set the abnormality cancellation number (special figure 1 variation number) from a plurality of values. In this case, the special figure 1 variation number having a large value may be easily selected as the special figure 2 abnormal variation number increases.

Eighth Modified Example
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of the present modification, a predetermined period from the start of the firing operation is an addition standby period in which the addition of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number which makes the abnormal determination number is not performed.

  FIG. 139 shows an example of the change of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number when the firing operation is started. Here, the presence or absence of the shooting operation is detected based on a touch switch signal from a touch switch that detects whether the player is touching the operation unit 24 or not. When the player does not touch the operation unit 24, the touch switch signal is turned off, and based on this, the firing operation is not performed. When the player touches the operation unit 24, the touch switch signal is turned on. It is assumed that the launch operation is being performed based on this.

  Then, it is determined that the firing operation is started based on the change of the touch switch signal from OFF to ON (t211). An addition waiting period is started based on the detection of the firing operation. The addition standby period is a period until the addable judgment number cleared based on the detection of the shooting operation reaches a predetermined value (here, 3), and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation in this addition standby period Even if is performed, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is not added.

  The number of possible additions is to be added each time the special figure 2 variation display game to be added to the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is not an addition standby period, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed Is updated by +1 each time (t212, t213, t214). Here, the addition waiting period ends when the number of possible additions reaches 3 and thereafter, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated by +1 every time the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation is executed (t215, t216) .

  At the start of the firing operation, the game ball may be fired to the area unintended by the player in the process of adjusting the firing force, but the special addition waiting period from the start of the firing operation is added to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number. By not performing this operation, it is possible to prevent an abnormal determination even when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed by mistake.

[Special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIG. 140 is performed instead of the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, an addition possible state determination process (step X 821) is performed to determine whether the special figure 2 abnormal variation number can be added or not. (2) When there is an addable flag that is set when it is determined that addition of the abnormal fluctuation number is possible (step X822; Y), addition of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is enabled.

[Addition possible state determination processing]
FIG. 141 shows the addition possible state determination process (step X821) in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process described above. In this addition possible state determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not the firing operation has been started (step X831). The start of the firing operation is detected by the change of the touch switch signal from OFF to ON as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a shooting operation detection means for detecting a shooting operation of the gaming ball.

  If the firing operation has not been started (step X 831; N), the process proceeds to step X 834. If the firing operation is started (step X 831; Y), clear the addable flag indicating that special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number can be added (step X 832) and clear the addable judgment number. (Step X833) It is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag that is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game causing irregular fluctuation is started (step X834).

  Then, when the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not present (step X 834; N), the addition possible state determination processing is ended. When the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X 834; Y), it is determined whether the addition available flag is already present (step X 835). If there is already an addable flag (step X 835; Y), the addable state determination process ends. If there is no addable flag (step X 835; N), the addable determination number is updated by 1 (step X 836), and it is determined whether the addable determination number is smaller than a specified value (step X 837).

  If the addable determination number is smaller than the specified value (step X837; Y), the addable state determination process ends. If the addition possible determination number is not smaller than the specified value (step X837; N), that is, if the specified value is reached, the addition possible flag is saved (step X838), and the addition possible state determination process is ended. As a result, the addition standby period is completed, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation count can be added.

  From the above, the launch operation detection means (game control apparatus 100) for detecting the launch operation of the game ball is provided, and the abnormality judgment number management means (game control apparatus 100) detects the launch operation launch by the launch operation detection means. After that, in the predetermined update standby period (here, the addition standby period), the update of the abnormality determination number in the direction of occurrence of the abnormality (here, addition) is not performed. In addition, the update standby period (here, the addition standby period) is a period until the number of occurrences of the event that becomes the update target in the abnormality occurrence direction of the number of abnormality determinations (here, the addition target) reaches a predetermined number. .

  Note that although it is assumed that the period during which the addition can be performed is three times that the special figure 2 variation display game that causes irregular variation is played, the number may be a number other than three. Further, instead of the number of the special view 2 variation display game causing the irregular variation, it may be determined that a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the firing operation.

  FIG. 142 shows an example in which the addition standby period is from the start of the firing operation to the elapse of a predetermined time. It is determined that the firing operation is started based on the change of the touch switch signal from OFF to ON (t221), and the addition standby period is started based on the detection of the shooting operation. The addition standby period is from the detection of the shooting operation until a predetermined time elapses. In this addition standby period, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which causes irregular fluctuation is not added. (T222). After that, when the predetermined time has passed and the addition standby period ends, the special figure 2 abnormal variation count is updated by +1 every time the special figure 2 variation display game causing irregular variation is executed (t223, t224).

[Addition possible state determination processing]
In order to perform such processing, in place of the addition possible state determination processing shown in FIG. 141, the addition possible state determination processing shown in FIG. 143 is performed. In this addition possible state determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not the firing operation has been started (step X831), and when the firing operation has not been started (step X831; N), the process proceeds to step X842. Also, when the firing operation is started (step X 831; Y), clear the addable flag indicating that special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number can be added (step X 832), and set the initial value to the addition standby timer. (Step X841).

  Then, when the addition standby timer is 0 (step X842; Y), that is, when the time has already been up, the addition possible state determination processing is ended. When the addition standby timer is not 0 (step X842; N), that is, when the time is not up, the addition standby timer is updated by -1 (step X843), and the addition standby timer becomes 0 (time up) ) Is determined (step X844). When the addition standby timer has not become 0 (step X844; N), the addition possible state determination processing is ended. If the addition standby timer becomes 0 (step X844; Y), the addition enable flag is saved (step X838), and the addition enable state determination process is ended. As a result, the addition standby period is completed, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation count can be added.

  In addition, the addition standby period may be triggered by another event. For example, as shown in FIG. 144, it may be started when there is a change in the gaming state mainly in the right hitting and the gaming state mainly in the left hitting. That is, it may be started when the main variable display game is changed. Even in such a case, the game ball may be fired to the area unintended by the player in order to change the power, and the game ball already fired may reach the area unintended by the player However, by not adding the special figure 2 abnormal variation number for a predetermined period from the change of the gaming state, even if the special figure 2 variation display game is executed by mistake, it is made not to be judged as abnormal be able to.

  The change from the gaming state with the main strike to the gaming state with the main strike left is detected based on the clearing of the high probability final change flag (steps Y802 and Y862). In the high probability state and the high probability final fluctuation, it is a gaming state with the main attack on the right, and the low probability states other than in the high probability final fluctuation is the gaming state with the main attack to the left. It may be detected on the basis of this.

  Then, on the basis of the change from the gaming state in which the right hitting is the main to the gaming state in which the left hitting is the main, the addition possible determination number is cleared and the addition standby period is started (t231). Here too, the number of times that can be added is to be added each time the special figure 2 variation display game to be added to the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is not an addition standby period, and the special figure 2 variation display game is Each execution is updated by +1 (t232, t233, t234). Here, the addition standby period ends when the number of possible additions reaches 3 and thereafter the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated by +1 every time the special figure 2 variation display game having irregular variation is executed (t235, t236).

[Addition possible state determination processing]
In order to perform such processing, in place of the addition possible state determination processing shown in FIG. 141, the addition possible state determination processing shown in FIG. 145 is performed. In this addition possible state determination processing, it is determined whether or not the left hitting gaming state has been started instead of the determination (step X831) as to whether or not the firing operation has been started (step X851). The subsequent processing is the same as the addable state determination processing shown in FIG.

  From the above, when the main variable display game is changed due to the change of the gaming state, the abnormality determination number management means (game control device 100) starts a predetermined update waiting period (here, the addition standby period) from the change. ) Does not perform updating (here, addition) of the number of abnormality determinations in the direction of occurrence of abnormality. In addition, the update standby period (here, the addition standby period) is a period until the number of occurrences of the event that becomes the update target in the abnormality occurrence direction of the number of abnormality determinations (here, the addition target) reaches a predetermined number. . Note that the update standby period (here, the addition standby period) may be a predetermined time from the change of the main variable display game due to the change of the gaming state.

Ninth Modified Example
Next, a ninth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the determination is performed based on the number of increases in the number of abnormality determinations within a predetermined abnormality monitoring period.

  FIG. 146 illustrates an example in which the determination is performed based on the number of increases in the number of abnormality determinations within a predetermined abnormality monitoring period. When the special figure 2 variation display game which causes irregular variation is started in a state in which the abnormality monitoring period is not in progress, the special figure 2 abnormal variation count is updated by +1 and the abnormality monitoring period is started (t241). The abnormality monitoring period is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation within this abnormality monitoring period is started every time the special figure 2 abnormal display game is started. The number is updated by +1 (t242, t243, t244).

  Then, when the abnormal monitoring period ends when the special monitoring number does not reach the specified value (5 in this case) within the abnormal monitoring period and a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the abnormal monitoring period, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation The number is cleared to 0 (t245). When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation is newly started after the abnormality monitoring period ends, a new abnormality monitoring period is started from there (t246). When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches specified value (here 5) within abnormal monitoring period, it decides that abnormal fluctuation has occurred and does the processing which corresponds. That is, it is determined here that abnormal fluctuation has occurred when the number of increases in the number of abnormal fluctuation in the abnormal condition monitoring period becomes a prescribed value (here, 5).

  If the game ball is fired to the area unintended by the player in the process of adjusting the launch force, the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation is not often executed a plurality of times in succession. Conceivable. On the other hand, when the player intentionally executes the special figure 2 variation display game in which the irregular variation occurs intentionally, it is considered that a plurality of special figure 2 variation display games are often executed in succession. Be Therefore, it is possible to detect only when the special figure 2 variation display game which is intentionally irregular variation is executed on condition that the increase number of the special figure 2 abnormal variation number within the predetermined time is equal to or more than the specified value. I have to.

[Special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIG. 147 is performed in place of the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, the process (steps X381 to X386) of subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number by the special figure 1 fluctuation number is not performed. Of course, this processing may be performed.

  Also, if there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387; Y), it is determined whether the abnormality monitoring timer is 0 (step X861). If it is 0 (step X861), that is, outside the abnormality monitoring period If it is, the initial value is set to the abnormality monitoring timer (step X862). Then, if the abnormality monitoring timer is not 0, processing to update -1 is performed (step X863). That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes an abnormality monitoring period setting means for setting an abnormality monitoring period for monitoring an increase in the number of abnormality determinations.

  Further, if the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), it is judged whether the time to monitor abnormality of the abnormality monitoring timer is reached (step X864), and the time is not up (step X864; N) ) Shifts to step X395. When the time is up (step X864; Y), it is determined whether the current value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area is a release flag (step X865).

  Then, when the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area is not the release flag (step X865; N), the process proceeds to step X395. In this case, it is within a period during which notification of an abnormality is performed. If the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area is a release flag (step X865; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X866), and the process moves to step X395. In this case, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number does not reach the specified value within the abnormality monitoring period.

  From the above, the anomaly monitoring period setting means (game control device 100) for setting the anomaly monitoring period for monitoring the increase number of the anomaly judgment number is provided, and the response means (game control device 100) The predetermined response is performed based on the fact that the number of updates (in this case, the number of increases in this case) of the number of abnormality determinations in the direction of the abnormality occurrence in the case of.

  Note that when the special view 2 variation display game in which irregular variation occurs during the abnormality monitoring period is started, the abnormality monitoring period may be extended. That is, the abnormality monitoring period setting unit (game control apparatus 100) may extend the abnormality monitoring period based on the addition of the number of abnormality determinations. In this case, when the abnormality monitoring timer is not 0 (step X861; N), processing is performed to add a predetermined addition value to the abnormality monitoring timer. Alternatively, when the process of step X861 is not performed and the special view 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387; Y), an initial value may be always set in the abnormality monitoring timer (step X862).

Tenth Modification
Next, a tenth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number, which is the abnormal judgment number, is cleared to 0 when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  FIG. 148 shows an example where the special condition 2 is satisfied and the abnormal variation count is cleared to 0 based on the end of the firing operation. As described above, the presence or absence of the firing operation can be detected based on the touch switch signal from the touch switch that detects whether the player is touching the operation unit 24 or not. The touch switch signal is turned on when the player touches the operation unit 24, and it is assumed that the firing operation is performed based on this.

  When the firing operation is started, the touch switch signal changes from OFF to ON (t251). Then, the game ball fired by the shooting operation wins the second starting winning opening 37, and the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is updated by +1 every time the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation is started ( t252, t253, t254).

  Thereafter, when the firing operation is ended, the touch switch signal changes from ON to OFF (t255). The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 in connection with this. As described above, by clearing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number to 0 on condition that the firing operation is ended, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number added by the player who has played the game before is handed over to the next player. Can be prevented. When the firing operation is newly started, the touch switch signal changes from OFF to ON (t256), and when the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation is started, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is +1 It is updated (t 257).

[Special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIG. 149 is performed instead of the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIG. In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), it is judged whether or not there is a firing operation (step X871).

  Then, if there is a firing operation (step X871; N), that is, if the touch switch signal is ON, the process proceeds to step X395. If the shooting operation is not performed (step X871; N), that is, if the touch switch signal is OFF, it is determined whether the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area is the release flag (step X873).

  Then, when the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area is not the release flag (step X873; N), the process proceeds to step X395. In this case, it is within a period during which notification of an abnormality is performed. When the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area is a release flag (step X873; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X874), and the process proceeds to step X395.

  The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 at the same time as the firing operation is not detected, but the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 after a predetermined time has elapsed after the firing operation is not detected. You may do it. Also, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number may be cleared to 0 based on the presence of a customer waiting state in which the special figure variation display game is not being executed, rather than the presence or absence of the firing operation. In this case as well, the special view 2 abnormal variation number may be cleared to 0 at the same time as the customer wait state is entered, or the special figure 2 abnormal variation number may be cleared to 0 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the customer wait state. Also good.

  Furthermore, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number may be cleared to 0 based on the fact that the special game variation display game is not being executed and the special game variation display game is not being executed. Also in this case, the firing operation may not be detected, and the special view 2 abnormal variation number may be cleared to 0 at the same time as the waiting for customer status, or the firing operation is not detected and the waiting for customer status The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number may be cleared to 0 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the time t.

  In addition, the special figure 2 0 clear of the abnormal fluctuation number which is based on the establishment of such various specified conditions is made only once within the specified time, or it is made possible only when the firing operation continues for the specified time. It is good. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number from being cleared to 0 intentionally.

  From the above, the launch operation detection means (game control apparatus 100) for detecting the launch operation of the game ball is provided, and the abnormality determination number management means (game control apparatus 100) does not detect the launch operation by the launch operation detection means. In this case, the initial value is set to the abnormality determination number (here, 0 is cleared) based on the fact that the variable display game is not executed and / or the variable display game is not executed.

  In addition, here, in order to prevent the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number added by the player who was playing the game before being taken over to the next player, the execution of the presence or absence of the firing operation and the special figure fluctuation display game Although the player's turn is judged based on the presence or absence of the player's turn, the player's turn may be judged by any other method. For example, the determination may be made on the basis of information on insertion / removal of a member card from a stand-up machine provided adjacent to a game machine or settlement of balance. Further, a sensor may be provided in the gaming machine to detect whether or not the player is present in front of the gaming machine, and determination may be made based on the information of this sensor.

Eleventh Modification
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the special figure 2 abnormality is based on the winning of the first special change prize device 38 or the second special change prize device 39 in the special gaming state based on the special figure 2 variation display game that becomes irregular change. The variation number is added.

  As shown in FIG. 150 (a), when the special view 2 change display game causing irregular change is started, the special view 2 abnormal change count is incremented by +1 (t261). And, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation indication game becomes special result, special game state is started (t262). In the special game state, one second game ball is awarded to the second special variation winning device 39 (t 263), and the special figure 2 for the number of winnings in the special winning opening residual ball processing corresponding to the 1R The abnormal fluctuation number is added (t 264).

  Furthermore, in the second game of the special game state, two game balls are winning in the second special variation winning device 39 (t 265, t 266), and only the number of winnings in the special winning opening residual ball processing corresponding to the 2 R The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is added (t267). In this way, when the player gains a special gaming state based on the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation by adding the special figure 2 abnormal variation number by winning in the special variation winning device, It can be easily determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is added only when winning in the special variation winning device in the special gaming state based on the special figure 2 variation display game that becomes irregular variation Also good. In this case, the special figure 2 abnormal variation count is not added even if the special figure 2 variation display game causing irregular variation is started (t271). And, when the game ball wins the special fluctuation winning device in the special game state where the special figure 2 fluctuation display game result which becomes irregular fluctuation becomes special result and is started (t 273, t 275, t 276), The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is added by the minute (t 274, t 277).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 150 (a) and 150 (b), the special result of the 2R probability variation D1 is derived, and the second special variation winning device 39 is opened. The same applies to the case where the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened. Also, the same process is performed in the case of small hits, but the process of adding the number of winning prizes to the special fluctuation winning device to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is the small hit remaining at the end of the special gaming state based on small hits It is done by the ball processing.

[Process during special figure 2 display]
In the gaming machine of the present modified example, processing is performed while displaying the special view 2 shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, instead of processing during the displaying of the special view 2 shown in FIGS. In the process during this special figure 2 display, as shown in FIG. 151, when special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y 815; Y), it is not in high probability (step Y 1601; N) and high probability final variation flag If there is no (step Y1602; N), the abnormal variation flag is saved (step Y1603).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 152, if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y 837; Y) and it is not in the high probability (step Y 847; N), it is determined whether it is the high probability final fluctuation. (Step Y1604). If it is the high probability final fluctuation (step Y1604; Y), the process moves to step Y852. If it is not the high probability final change (step Y1604; N), the abnormal change flag is saved (step Y1605), and the process proceeds to step Y852. That is, the abnormal fluctuation flag is saved in the case of the big hit and the small hit based on the special view 2 fluctuation display game which becomes the irregular fluctuation.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Also, in place of the special winning opening residual ball processing shown in FIG. 80, the special winning opening residual ball processing shown in FIG. 153 is performed. In the special winning opening residual ball processing, it is determined whether there is an abnormal fluctuation flag (step Y1606), and if there is no abnormal fluctuation flag (step Y1606; N), the process proceeds to step Y1041. Further, when there is an abnormal fluctuation flag (step Y1606; Y), the value of the special winning opening count number area is added to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number (step Y1607), and the process shifts to step Y1041. As a result, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is added for the number of winnings in each round in the special gaming state based on becoming a big hit in the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
Also, instead of the big hit end process shift setting process shown in FIG. 81, a big hit end process shift setting process shown in FIG. 154 is performed. In the big hit end process shift setting process, a process of clearing the abnormal change flag is performed (step Y1608).

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Also, in place of the small hit residual ball processing shown in FIG. 86, the small hit residual ball processing shown in FIG. 155 is performed. In this small hit residual ball processing, if it is not the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), that is, if it is the small hit of special figure 2, it is judged whether there is an abnormal fluctuation flag (step Y1609).

  When there is no abnormal fluctuation flag (step Y1609; N), the process moves to step Y1278. If there is an abnormal fluctuation flag (step Y1609; Y), the value of the special winning opening count number area is added to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number (step Y1610), and the abnormal fluctuation flag is cleared (step Y1611) , Step Y1041. As a result, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is added by the number of prizes in the special gaming state based on becoming a small hit in the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation.

  From the above, the special variation winning device (the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39) which enables winning of the gaming ball in the special gaming state is provided, and the abnormality judgment number management means (game control device 100) is configured such that the result of the non-main variable display game becomes a special result, and the number of abnormality determinations is updated (added here) in the direction of the abnormality occurrence based on the occurrence of winning in the special variable winning device It will be

  It should be noted that the number of winning on the special variation winning device in the special gaming state based on the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation is not added to the special figure 2 abnormal variation number, but is distinct from the special figure 2 abnormal variation number It is also possible to count as the number of abnormal winnings in the above, and to determine that an abnormality has occurred based on the number of abnormal winnings reaching a prescribed value.

  In addition, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the player obtains a certain profit or more by winning in the special variation winning device in the special gaming state based on the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation. Also good. For example, the special game state based on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation is constantly monitored for the period of executing the special figure fluctuation display game for a predetermined number of past times from now and the number of prize balls in the predetermined time At the end, the number of winning balls in the predetermined period is compared with the reference value. Then, when the number of winning balls in the predetermined period exceeds the reference value, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. The reference value is the number of winning balls assumed when playing a game so as to make a main change in the predetermined period, and the special figure 2 is not counted, and only the special figure 1 variation number is counted. It may be calculated in a game in a period, or may be one calculated at the design stage of the gaming machine, or a value measured in advance by a gaming machine maker or a game arcade.

Twelfth Modified Example
Next, a twelfth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of the present modification, notification of occurrence of abnormality to the player is not immediately performed.

  As described above, the special figure 2 abnormal variation occurrence flag is saved based on the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaching a predetermined value, and the external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred based on this flag and the gaming machine The output of the error state signal to the device outside the gaming machine is started, and it becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation by the management device of the game arcade or the like. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display, voice or the like.

  Here, if the notification by the display control or the voice by the presentation control device 300 is determined to be abnormal at the same time as the abnormality, the player can grasp the condition to be judged as abnormal, and within a range not judged to be abnormal from next time. It is possible to play the special figure fluctuation display game which becomes regular fluctuation. For this reason, the timing at which it is determined that the notification by the display control or the sound by the effect control device 300 is determined to be abnormal is different from the timing at which the player determines that the condition is determined to be abnormal.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 156 and timer interrupt processing (not shown). As shown in FIG. 156, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Reading of the input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as brightness of LED and liquid crystal and volume, and change of brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a notification delay process (step C11) for delaying a notification process of occurrence of abnormality until a predetermined condition is satisfied is performed, and a random number update process for updating random numbers for determining details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game Step C12) is performed.

  Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C13) is performed to cope with the setting, and the effect display editing process (step C14) for editing the setting for controlling the progress of the effect and the drawing command ) And set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C15). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C16). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C16 that the frame switching timing is not reached (step C16; N), the processing in step C16 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C16 that it is the frame switching timing (step C16; Y), the screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C18) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step C18) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C19) A movable body control process (step C20) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 157 shows the reception command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter which counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command reception (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). When it is determined that the command reception number is 0 (step C202; N), the reception command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), and the command reading index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205). It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, without analyzing the command directly in the reception command buffer, the content of the reception command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. In this way, it is possible to move a command (data) to make a vacancy in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the processing returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). When it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the reception command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 158 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  If it is determined in step C232 or C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If ACT is determined to be the correct combination in step C234 in step C234 (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235; Y), variation system command processing (step C236) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variation system command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to a big hit medium effect, or a command instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or an end screen) related to small hit medium effects. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), symbol system command processing (step C240) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as pending number command or error command. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol system commands (step C243). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; Y), the read change command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is ended.

  In the one-shot system command processing (step C 242), the special drawing 1 is processed for the special drawing 1 holding when the decorative special drawing holding number command corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding (first start storage) is received. 1 special information 2 pending information setting process that performs processing related to the special figure 2 pending when receiving a decoration information setting process and a special figure 2 pending number command corresponding to the special figure 2 pending (second start storage) included. In the special view 1 suspension information setting process and the special view 2 suspension information setting process, a process of displaying a decoration special view start storage display corresponding to the occurred suspension on the display device 41 is performed. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a start storage notification means for displaying start storage notification displaying information on the start storage by the start storage display corresponding to each start storage.

  Also, with pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading advance notice or pre-reading advance notice effect), does the special figure fluctuation display game become a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) not executed is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined degree of reliability whether or not it becomes (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be), to perform decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a different mode from normal It is an effect such as performing effect display on the device 41. The pre-reading system commands (pre-reading variation system commands and pre-reading symbol system commands) are commands to notify in advance of variation patterns and stop symbols corresponding to starting storages targeted for pre-reading effects. Is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 159 shows one-shot command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized (step C261). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C261; Y), the RAM initialization processing is performed (step C262), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the RAM initialization process (step C262), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, scenario data for initializing the RAM is set in order to perform an effect when the initialization of the RAM is performed.

  If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C261; N), the MODE is a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has been recovered from the power failure without being initialized. It is determined whether it is a corresponding one (step C263). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C263; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C264), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C264), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and recovery screen information is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to provide an effect upon power failure recovery.

  If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to a power failure recovery command (step C263; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a customer waiting demo command indicating the start of a customer waiting demo Step C265). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C265; Y), the customer waiting demonstration processing is performed (step C266), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C266), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demonstration, and customer waiting scenario data is set to perform the customer waiting effect.

  In addition, if it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C265; N), special figure 2 is transmitted when the abnormal fluctuation number reaches a specified value. 2) It is determined whether it corresponds to an abnormal fluctuation occurrence command (step C267). And, when MODE corresponds to the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command (step C 267; Y), an initial value is set to a notification start delay timer for delaying the start of notification processing by the effect control device 300 (Step C268), the one-shot command processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command (step C267; N), the game controller 100 in the MODE has a notification of abnormality regarding the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation. It is judged whether it corresponds to the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command transmitted based on the termination (step C269). And, when MODE corresponds to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (step C269; Y), the notification end delay timer for delaying the end of the notification processing by the effect control device 300 is set to an initial value (Step C270), the one-shot command processing ends. If the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command (step C269; N), the processing corresponding to the other MODE omitted here is performed, and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

[Notification delay process]
FIG. 160 shows notification delay processing in the main processing described above. In this notification delay process, first, it is determined whether the notification start delay timer is 0 (step C281). When the notification start delay timer is 0 (step C281; Y), the process proceeds to step C285. If the notification start delay timer is not 0 (step C281; N), the notification start delay timer is updated by 1 (step C282), and it is determined whether the notification start delay timer has become 0 (step C283).

  If the notification start delay timer is not 0 (step C283; N), the process proceeds to step C285. Further, when the notification start delay timer is 0 (step C283; Y), the special view 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is started (step C284), and the process proceeds to step C285. Thereby, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number becomes a specified value in the game control apparatus 100 and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300, the predetermined time from the reception of the special figure 2 abnormal variation generation command Later, notification of the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation by display, voice or the like will be started.

  In step C285, it is determined whether the notification end delay timer is 0 (step C285). If the notification end delay timer is 0 (step C285; Y), the notification delay process is ended. If the notification end delay timer is not 0 (step C285; N), the notification end delay timer is updated by 1 (step C286), and it is determined whether the notification end delay timer has become 0 (step C287).

  If the notification end delay timer is not 0 (step C287; N), the notification delay process is ended. When the notification end delay timer is 0 (step C287; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is ended (step C288), and the notification delay process is ended. Thereby, when the notification about the special figure 2 abnormal change is finished in the game control apparatus 100 and the special figure 2 abnormal change cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300, the predetermined time from the reception of the special figure 2 abnormal change cancellation command Notification of the occurrence of the special variation 2 abnormal variation by display, voice or the like will end later.

  From the above, the response means (game control apparatus 100, effect control apparatus 300) outputs information to a device provided outside the gaming machine based on the fact that the number of abnormality determinations satisfies the predetermined condition, and further separate conditions The notification is made in the gaming machine based on the establishment. The initial value of the notification start delay timer may be selected from a plurality of values, and the predetermined condition may be more difficult to grasp.

Thirteenth Modification
Next, a thirteenth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. In the gaming machine of this modification, it is possible to add the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number forming the abnormal judgment number based on the winning on the second start winning opening 37 corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
In the gaming machine of this modification, in place of the starting opening switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. 34, the starting opening switch monitoring processing shown in FIG. 161 is performed. In this starting opening switch monitoring process, the second starting winning opening when not in high probability (step X 502; N), not in big hit (step X 503; N), and not in high probability final fluctuation (step X 504; N) Based on the winning of 37, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step X881).

  The special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y 229) in the special figure 2 normal processing shown in FIG. The special figure 2 abnormal variation number may be added to both the winning of the second start winning opening 37 which is an opportunity to execute the special figure 2 variation display game. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is not set (step Y 229) in the special figure 2 normal processing shown in FIG. The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number may be added only by the winning of the start winning opening 37. In this way, the same control as in the third modification is obtained.

  In addition, based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 which is an execution trigger of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which is the main fluctuation, the special figure 1 fluctuation number which makes the abnormal cancellation number may be added. In this case, the special figure 1 variation number may be added or not based on the start of the special figure 1 variation display game that is the main variation.

  That is, by applying the configuration of the present modification to the first embodiment and each modification described above, the number of abnormality determinations is abnormal based on the winning of the starting winning opening corresponding to the non-mainly variation display game. Update in the direction of occurrence (here, addition) is possible. In addition, the number of abnormal cancellations can be updated (here, added) based on the winning of the starting winning opening corresponding to the main variable display game.

  Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment and the like, updating (in this case, adding) the number of abnormality determinations to the abnormality occurrence direction by the start of the non-main variable display game or the number of abnormality cancellations by the main main variable display game It is also possible to use the update of (in this case, addition) together. That is, the number of abnormality determinations is updated in the direction of occurrence of abnormality based on one or both of the winning of the starting winning opening corresponding to the non-main variable display game and the start of the non-main variable display game (here, addition ) Can be possible. In addition, the number of abnormal cancellations may be updated (here, added) based on one or both of the winning of the starting winning opening corresponding to the main variable display game and the start of the main variable display game. it can. In addition, with regard to the update condition of the number of abnormality judgments and the number of abnormality cancellations, depending on the game state or other conditions, it is determined whether or not to use the winning on the starting winning opening or the start of the variable display game. It may be selectable.

  In the first embodiment and each modification described above, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is added only when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is an irregular fluctuation, but the special figure 1 fluctuation display The same process may be performed for the game. That is, the special drawing is based on one or both of the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which becomes the irregular fluctuation and the winning of the first start winning opening 36 which becomes the execution trigger of the special drawing 1 fluctuation display game which becomes the irregular fluctuation. 1) Add the number of abnormal fluctuations.

  In this case, the special figure 2 fluctuation number which makes the abnormal cancellation number may be added based on execution of the 2nd special figure fluctuation display game which becomes the main fluctuation. In addition, the special figure 2 variation number may be added based on the winning of the second start winning opening 37, which is an opportunity to execute the special figure 2 variation display game which is the main variation, or may not be performed. good.

  Then, when the special figure 1 abnormal variation number reaches the specified value, the external information indicating that the special figure 1 abnormal variation has occurred and the output of the gaming machine error status signal to the device outside the gaming machine are started, Special figure 1 makes it possible to grasp the occurrence of abnormal fluctuation with the management device etc. In addition, the special figure 1 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted vis-a-vis production control device 300, production control device 300 notifies the effect that special figure 1 abnormal fluctuation occurs with the indication and voice etc on the basis of reception of this command Let's do it.

  From the above, the abnormality determination number management means (game control apparatus 100) receives either a winning on the start winning entry corresponding to the non-main variable display game or the start of the non-main variable display game Based on both, the number of abnormality determinations is updated (added here) in the direction of the abnormality occurrence. Also, the abnormality determination number management means updates the number of abnormality cancellations based on one or both of the winning of the start winning opening corresponding to the main variable display game and the start of the main variable display game ( In this case, addition is performed, and the abnormality determination number is updated (subtracted here) in the abnormality cancellation direction based on the fact that the abnormality cancellation number satisfies the predetermined condition.

  Also, in the above description, the special machine 1 variable display game and the special machine 2 variable display game have been described that can be executed simultaneously, but the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed simultaneously It is also applicable to machines.

  Further, in order to enable the game to be performed in accordance with the design of the gaming machine, it is possible not to obtain a profit in the special figure fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation. For example, among the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, only the start winning opening corresponding to the special view variation display game which is the main variation enables generation of the right to execute the special view variation display game by winning. Even if the other start winning entry is a prize, it may be decided that only the award ball is paid out without generating the right to execute the special view variable display game.

  In addition, the path to the second special variation winning device 39 is made longer in order to prevent the player from making a profit in the special gaming state based on the small hits which often occur in the special figure 2 variation display game which becomes irregular variation. Right-handling, such as placing a large number of nails and placing a material with high friction in the flow path so that the flow-down speed of the gaming ball in the path to the second special fluctuation winning device 39 becomes slow. The arrival time until the game ball reaches the second special variation winning device 39 after the start may be made longer. As such an arrival time, even if it is recognized that a small hit has occurred in the special view 2 variable display game which becomes irregular fluctuation from the state of left hitting, it is based on the small hit even if it is changed to the right. It is desirable that the arrival time be such that half or more of the opening time of the second special variation winning device 39 in the special gaming state has elapsed or all the opening time has ended.

  Further, in the first embodiment and each modification described above, the number of abnormality determinations is determined by the winning of the start winning opening corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game which is not the main or the start of the special figure fluctuation display game which is not the main Special figure 2 which makes the abnormal fluctuation number is renewed to abnormal occurrence direction, addition is used as the renewal to this abnormal occurrence direction. Then, the number of abnormal cancellations is updated based on one or both of the winning of the start winning opening corresponding to the main figure variation display game and the start of the main figure variation display game, and the abnormality The abnormality determination number is updated in the abnormality cancellation direction based on the cancellation number satisfying the predetermined condition, and subtraction is used as the update in the abnormality cancellation direction.

  On the other hand, the update in the abnormality occurrence direction may be subtracted, and the update in the abnormality release direction may be added. In such a case, the process of setting an initial value (for example, 5) is performed instead of the process of clearing the number of abnormality determinations to 0, and the process of setting an initial value (for example, 5). The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted by the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 which becomes the execution opportunity of the game. Then, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches a prescribed value (for example, 0), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number which makes the abnormal cancellation number reaches the specified value, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is added and updated which is the abnormal cancellation direction. Of course, as to the special figure 1 fluctuation number which makes the abnormal cancellation number, not the addition but the subtraction update may be similarly performed.

  The gaming machine as described above executes the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball on the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37) provided in the gaming area 32, and the variable display It is a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state capable of giving a gaming value to a player when the result of the game is a special outcome, and the first starting winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36 as a starting winning opening. The first variation display game (special figure 1 as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 is provided with a second starting winning opening 37 disposed at a position different from the winning opening 36 The first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the variable display game and the second variable display game (special drawing) as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37 2) 2 variable display games) The first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 are provided with motion display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100), and the first starting winning opening 36 is adjusted by adjusting the launch force of the game ball. Are arranged in the game area 32 so that the player can select the state of aiming for a prize and the state for aiming for a prize on the second start prize hole 37, and depending on the gaming state, the first variation display game and the second variation display game One of the variable display games is configured to be defined as a main variable display game (main fluctuation), and the winning prize winning opening corresponding to a non-main variable display game (irregular fluctuation), Based on the abnormality judgment number management means (game control device 100) which updates the abnormality judgment number in the abnormality occurrence direction based on one or both of the start of the fluctuation display game and the abnormality judgment number satisfying the predetermined condition. Corresponding means (game controller 100, the effect control device 300) for performing predetermined correspondence includes a, a.

  Here, the predetermined response includes notification by display, voice or the like, transmission of information to a device outside the gaming machine, and the like. Further, updating the number of abnormality determinations in the direction of occurrence of the abnormality means performing one of predetermined addition or subtraction of the number of abnormality determinations.

  Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to execute the main variable display game, so that the game can be performed according to the design of the gaming machine.

  Further, the countermeasure means is to perform the predetermined countermeasure based on the number of abnormality judgments reaching the predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined response from being performed immediately when the user unintentionally executes the non-main variable display game.

  Further, the abnormality determination number management means updates the number of abnormality cancellations based on one or both of the winning of the starting winning opening corresponding to the main variable display game and the start of the main variable display game. The abnormality determination number is updated in the abnormality removal direction based on the fact that the abnormality removal number satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined response from being performed immediately when the user unintentionally executes the non-main variable display game.

  Here, updating the number of determinations of abnormality in the direction of removal of abnormality means updating the number of determinations of abnormality in the opposite direction to the direction of occurrence of abnormality. If the direction of occurrence of abnormality is addition, the direction of removal of abnormality is subtraction. If the direction is subtraction, the anomaly cancellation direction is addition. In addition, also about update of the number of abnormal cancellation | releases, predetermined one among addition or subtraction is performed.

  Further, the abnormality judgment number management means, the number of abnormality cancellations necessary for updating the abnormality judgment number in the abnormality canceling direction, as the abnormality judgment number is closer to the value satisfying the predetermined condition that the correspondence means performs predetermined correspondence. Will be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for a predetermined response to be performed when the variation display game which is not intended primarily is performed.

  Further, the abnormality determination number management means selects and sets, from among a plurality of values, the value of the abnormality removal number satisfying the predetermined condition necessary to update the abnormality determination number in the abnormality removal direction. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of abnormal cancellations, and to make it easy to perform a predetermined response when the intention is not the main variable display game.

  In addition, a firing operation detection means (game control device 100) for detecting a shooting operation of the gaming ball is provided, and the abnormality judgment number management means detects a start of the shooting operation by the shooting operation detection means This means that the number of abnormality determinations is not updated in the direction of abnormality occurrence. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined response from being immediately performed when the unintended variation display game is unintentionally executed in the process of adjusting the launch force.

  Further, when the main variable display game is changed due to the change of the gaming state, the abnormality determination number management means does not update the number of abnormality determinations in the abnormality occurrence direction during the predetermined update waiting period after the change. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined response from being immediately performed when the unintended variation display game is unintentionally executed in the process of adjusting the launch force.

  Further, the update standby period is a period until the number of occurrences of the event to be updated in the direction of occurrence of the abnormality determination number reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined response from being immediately performed when the unintended variation display game is unintentionally executed in the process of adjusting the launch force.

  The game control apparatus further includes an abnormality monitoring period setting unit (game control apparatus 100) for setting an abnormality monitoring period for monitoring the number of updates of the number of abnormality determinations in the direction of the abnormality occurrence. The predetermined response is to be performed based on the number of updates in the direction of occurrence of abnormality exceeding the predetermined number. Therefore, a predetermined response can be made to be performed when the intention is not the main variable display game.

  Further, the abnormality monitoring period setting means extends the abnormality monitoring period based on the number of abnormality determinations being updated in the direction of occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, a predetermined response can be made to be performed when the intention is not the main variable display game.

  Further, there is provided a launch operation detection means for detecting the launch operation of the gaming ball, and the abnormality determination number management means is in a state where the launch operation detection means does not detect the launch operation and / or a state where the variation display game is not executed On the basis of the fact that the number of abnormality judgments has been reached, the initial value is set (0 is cleared or a specific value is set). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of abnormality determinations of the previous player from being taken over by the later player.

  In addition, the special variation winning device (the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39) which enables winning of the gaming ball in the special gaming state, the abnormality determination number management means is not the main variable display The result of the game is a special result, and the number of abnormality determinations is updated in the direction of occurrence of abnormality based on the occurrence of a prize on the special variation winning device. Therefore, a predetermined response can be made when profit is obtained by a non-main variable display game.

  In addition, the response means outputs information to a device provided outside the gaming machine based on the condition that the number of abnormality judgments satisfies the predetermined condition, and makes a notification in the gaming machine based on the fulfillment of the additional condition. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the condition under which the predetermined response is performed from being grasped.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be combined appropriately and applied.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

32 game area 36 first start winning opening (start winning opening)
37 2nd start winning opening (starting winning opening)
38 1st Special Variation Winning Device (Special Variation Winning Device)
39 2nd Special Variation Winning Device (Special Variation Winning Device)
100 game control device (first variation display game execution control means, second variation display game execution control means, abnormality determination number management means, response means)
300 Effect Control Device (Corresponding Means)

Claims (2)

A variable display game is executed based on the game ball winning to the start winning opening provided in the game area, and a special game state capable of giving a game value to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result In a gaming machine that generates
A first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening disposed at a different position from the first starting winning opening as the starting winning opening,
First variation display game execution control means capable of executing a first variation display game as the variation display game based on winning of a game ball on the first start winning opening;
And second variation display game execution control means capable of executing a second variation display game as the variation display game based on winning of the game ball on the second start winning opening,
The first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening adjust the power of the game balls to aim for winning on the first starting winning opening, and winning on the second starting winning opening. Arranged in the game area to be able to select the state to aim at,
As gaming state, a first game condition defined as variable display games first variable display game is the main, and the second game condition in which the second variable display game is defined as a variable display game as a main, and Have
At least in the first gaming state, the number of judgments of abnormality is based on one or both of the winning on the starting winning opening corresponding to the non-main variable display game and the start of the non-main variable display game. further and new to the abnormality determining the number of management means,
And a response unit that performs a predetermined response based on the fact that the abnormality determination number satisfies a predetermined condition .
A game machine characterized in that the abnormality determination number management means does not update the number of abnormality determinations for a predetermined period from the change when the main variable display game is changed due to the change of the game state . A variable display game is executed based on the game ball winning to the start winning opening provided in the game area, and a special game state capable of giving a game value to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result In a gaming machine that generates
A first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening disposed at a different position from the first starting winning opening as the starting winning opening,
First variation display game execution control means capable of executing a first variation display game as the variation display game based on winning of a game ball on the first start winning opening;
And second variation display game execution control means capable of executing a second variation display game as the variation display game based on winning of the game ball on the second start winning opening,
The first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening adjust the power of the game balls to aim for winning on the first starting winning opening, and winning on the second starting winning opening. Arranged in the game area to be able to select the state to aim at,
As a game state, there is a first gaming state defined as a variable display game mainly composed of the first variable display game, and a second gaming state set as a variable display game mainly composed of the second variable display game And
At least in the first gaming state, the number of judgments of abnormality is based on one or both of the winning on the starting winning opening corresponding to the non-main variable display game and the start of the non-main variable display game. Anomaly determination number management means to be updated;
A response unit that performs a predetermined response based on the fact that the abnormality determination number satisfies a predetermined condition;
Launch operation detection means for detecting a launch operation of the gaming ball;
The abnormality determination count management means, Yu Technical machine you characterized in that the predetermined period from the detection of the start of the firing operation detector by firing operation is not updating the abnormality determination count.

Images